wesleyan metropark adventure central kitchen … · metropark adventure central kitchen...

WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL

KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES

Bid No. 20-003

JANUARY 24, 2020

409 E. MONUMENT AVENUE THIRD FLOOR

DAYTON, OH 45402-1374 (937) 275-7275

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Wesleyan MetroPark Adventure Central Kitchen Modifications and Upgrades - Bid 20-003

1

FIVE RIVERS METROPARKS

STANDARD CONTRACT DOCUMENTS – PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS

Table of Contents STANDARD CONTRACT DOCUMENTS – PUBLIC IMPROVEMENTS .................................................... 1

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS .......................................................................................................................... 5

INVITATION TO BIDDERS .............................................................................................................................. 6

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS ..................................................................................................................... 8

1.0 Receipt of Bids ............................................................................................................................... 8

2.0 Examination of Contract Documents and the Work Site .................................................. 8

3.0 Interpretation of Quantities in the Bid Proposal ................................................................... 8

4.0 Addenda ......................................................................................................................................... 9

5.0 Modification and Withdrawal of Bid ....................................................................................... 9

6.0 Non-Collusion Affidavit ................................................................................................................ 9

7.0 Bid Proposal .................................................................................................................................... 9

8.0 Bid Guaranty ................................................................................................................................ 10

9.0 Statement of Qualifications ..................................................................................................... 11

10.0 Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors for Specified Portions of the Work ...................... 11

11.0 Bidder Investigation ................................................................................................................ 11

12.0 Combination or Conditional Proposals ............................................................................. 12

13.0 Contract Award and Execution .......................................................................................... 12

14.0 Personal Property Tax Affidavit ............................................................................................ 13

15.0 Contractor’s Insurance .......................................................................................................... 13

16.0 Prevailing Wage ....................................................................................................................... 17

17.0 Special Conditions and Supplemental Specifications ................................................. 17

18.0 Bonds Accompanying Bid To Be Executed By Authorized Surety ............................. 17

19.0 Certificate of Compliance through ODAS ...................................................................... 17

BIDDING FORMS .......................................................................................................................................... 18

DOCUMENTS TO ACCOMPANY BIDS ................................................................................................ 18

BID PROPOSAL ........................................................................................................................................ 19

BID BREAKDOWN FORM ....................................................................................................................... 20

BID GUARANTY AND CONTRACT BOND .......................................................................................... 21


2

STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 23

CORPORATE AFFIDAVIT ........................................................................................................................ 24

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ............................................................................................................... 25

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE ........................................................................................................... 27

SUBSTITUTION LIST .................................................................................................................................... 28

PROPOSED USE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS FOR SPECIFIC PORTIONS OF THE WORK ............... 29

CONTRACT FORMS ..................................................................................................................................... 30

NOTICE OF AWARD ............................................................................................................................... 31

CONTRACT ............................................................................................................................................... 32

CONTRACT BOND AND MAINTENANCE BOND ............................................................................. 35

PERSONAL PROPERTY TAX AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................ 37

NOTICE TO PROCEED ............................................................................................................................ 38

CHANGE ORDER .................................................................................................................................... 39

GENERAL CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 41

1.0 Conformity with Plans and Specifications ........................................................................... 41

2.0 Schedules, Reports and Records ............................................................................................ 41

3.0 Architect/Engineer’s Authority ................................................................................................ 42

4.0 Owner’s Inspector ....................................................................................................................... 43

5.0 Inspection and Testing ............................................................................................................... 43

6.0 Correction of Work ..................................................................................................................... 44

7.0 Surveys, Permits, Regulations, Land and Right-of-Way .................................................... 44

8.0 Maintenance of the Work Site ................................................................................................ 45

9.0 Laws to be Observed ................................................................................................................. 45

10.0 Federal Aid Provisions ............................................................................................................. 45

11.0 Responsibility for Damage Claims ...................................................................................... 46

12.0 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work .................................................................................. 46

13.0 Supervision by Contractor .................................................................................................... 46

14.0 Personal Liability of Public Officials ..................................................................................... 47

15.0 Non-Waiver of Legal Rights .................................................................................................. 47

16.0 O.S.H.A. Compliance ............................................................................................................. 47

17.0 Changes in the Work .............................................................................................................. 47

18.0 Changes in Contract Price ................................................................................................... 47

19.0 Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages ............................................................ 48


3

20.0 Suspension of Work, Termination and Delay ................................................................... 48

21.0 Scope of Payment .................................................................................................................. 50

22.0 Compensation for Altered Quantities ............................................................................... 50

23.0 Extra Work and Force Account Work ................................................................................ 50

24.0 Eliminated Items ....................................................................................................................... 52

25.0 Claims for Adjustment and Disputes .................................................................................. 53

26.0 Payments to Contractor ........................................................................................................ 53

27.0 Acceptance of Final Payments as Release .................................................................... 54

28.0 Contract Security .................................................................................................................... 54

29.0 Assignments............................................................................................................................... 55

30.0 Indemnification ........................................................................................................................ 55

31.0 Patented Devices, Materials and Process ....................................................................... 55

32.0 Subcontractors ......................................................................................................................... 55

33.0 Guaranty .................................................................................................................................... 56

34.0 Dispute Resolution ................................................................................................................... 57

35.0 Taxes ............................................................................................................................................ 57

36.0 Nondiscrimination in Employment ...................................................................................... 57

37.0 Contract Work Performed by the Owner ......................................................................... 57

38.0 Certified Payroll ........................................................................................................................ 57

39.0 Utilities.......................................................................................................................................... 59

ADDITIONAL CONTRACT FORMS ............................................................................................................ 60

NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT ......................................................... 60

AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................................................ 60

WAIVERS OF MECHANICS’ LIENS ........................................................................................................ 60

PAYROLL INFORMATION ....................................................................................................................... 60

FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT .................................................................................................................. 60

NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT ......................................................... 61

AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT ........................................................................................................................ 63

CONDITIONAL PARTIAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN ............................................................... 66

UNCONDITIONAL PARTIAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN ......................................................... 69

CONDITIONAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN ............................................................................... 71

UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN ......................................................................... 73

PAYROLL INFORMATION ....................................................................................................................... 75


4

FINAL PAYROLL AFFIDAVIT ................................................................................................................... 77

SPECIAL CONDITIONS of the CONTRACT ............................................................................................. 78

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................................................................... 79

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................. 79

PROJECT MEETINGS ............................................................................................................................... 84

SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS ......................................................................................................... 85

SCHEDULE OF VALUES ........................................................................................................................... 89

CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ......................................................... 89

PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............................................................................................................................. 91

FINAL CLEANING .................................................................................................................................... 93

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ....................................................................................................... 94

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................................................... 96

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................... 98


5

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Bid No. 20-003

The Five Rivers MetroParks (FRMP, Owner) will receive sealed bid proposals for the WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES, Bid No. 20-003 until MARCH 3, 2020 at 11:00 a.m., local time, at Five Rivers MetroParks Main Office, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374, at which time and place the bids will be publicly opened and read aloud. The construction cost estimate is $340,560.00. Copies of the Bid Documents may be obtained at the Five Rivers MetroParks bid management website at: https://www.metroparks.org/about/do-business-with-us/#bid-on-active-projects Bidders must provide contact information including a valid email address in order to download a PDF containing the Bid Documents and to receive Bid Addenda. Potential bidders are advised to carefully review the Project Experience requirements described in the Information for Bidders, Section 9.0, “Statement of Qualifications.” A pre-bid meeting will be held FEBRUARY 18, 2020 at 2:00 p.m., local time, at 2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd, Dayton OH 45417-9544. The purpose is for FRMP and the Owner’s Consultant to review the Contract Documents and answer any questions. Provide bid proposals in a sealed envelope as described in the Invitation to Bidders and in the Information for Bidders. Each proposal shall be accompanied by a 100% Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond, or by a certified check, cashier’s check or letter of credit in the amount of ten percent (10%) of the bid, made payable to Five Rivers MetroParks as a guarantee that if the proposal is accepted, a contract will be entered into and its performance properly secured by a satisfactory bond in amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price. The proposals must be made on the forms provided in the Contract Documents, or a copy thereof.

Questions concerning the Contract Documents should be directed to Joseph R. Zimmerman, Project Manager (Owner’s Project Manager), at 937-277-4825 or by email at [email protected]

The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all proposals; to waive any informalities or irregularities in the bids received or to accept any proposal which is deemed most favorable to Five Rivers MetroParks, an equal opportunity employer.

Advertised: January 24, 2020 January 31, 2020

February 7, 2020

https://www.metroparks.org/about/do-business-with-us/#bid-on-active-projects


6

INVITATION TO BIDDERS

1. Invitation is hereby given for sealed bids for:

Modify and upgrade the existing kitchen at Adventure Central to include a larger kitchen, new kitchen equipment and hood, new prep sink and counter, an improved serving counter, relocated milk cooler, increased dry storage, and a new combined laundry room and janitor’s closet with mop sink. New work will include selective demolition of the existing building, structural foundations and slab, exterior walls, roof, new interior finishes for the renovated and addition areas, and mechanical, plumbing, electrical, and fire sprinkler modifications.

2. Bids shall be submitted in accordance with this Invitation and the Information for Bidders.

3. One bid for construction will be received.

• Renovation of existing commercial kitchen.

4. The construction shall be in full accord with the Contract Documents. Bidding

requirements and Contract Documents are on file and may be examined at the following locations:

Allied Construction Industries 3 Kovach Drive Cincinnati, OH 45215 Dayton Builders Exchange 2077 Embury Park Road Dayton, Ohio 45414

5. Copies of the Bid Documents may be obtained at no cost from the Five Rivers

MetroParks bid management website at: https://www.metroparks.org/about/do-business-with-us/#bid-on-active-projects Bidders must provide contact information including a valid email address in order to download a PDF containing the Bid Documents and to receive Bid Addenda.

6. Bidders are required to check the Five Rivers MetroParks bid management website for addenda prior to placing their bids. Failure to acknowledge all addenda in the spaces provided on the Bid Proposal Form may be reason to reject a bid.

7. Proposals shall be properly and completely executed on the Bid Proposal Form and Bid Breakdown Form furnished with the Bid Documents, and signed by the full name and business address of each person or company interested in the same.

8. Project estimate: $340,560.00 9. This project is subject to State of Ohio prevailing wage rates.

https://www.metroparks.org/about/do-business-with-us/#bid-on-active-projects


7

10. Construction shall commence within ten (10) days after “Notice to Proceed,” and shall

be substantially completed within 155 days of the Notice to Proceed. See the Special Conditions of the Contract for specific schedule milestone requirements.

11. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive any

informalities in bidding.

12. In order to be considered responsive and responsible, the bidder must be able to demonstrate compliance with the Project Experience requirements described in the Information for Bidders, Section 9, Statement of Qualifications.

13. Bonding requirements

• Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond in the amount of 100% of the total amount of bid

submitted, or a certified check or letter of credit in the amount of 10% of the bid.

• Performance Bond in the amount of 100% of the total amount of contract upon contract award.

• Labor and Material Payment Bond in the amount of 100% of the contract upon contract award.

14. Items to be provided in Bid Package:

• Documents to Accompany Bids Checklist

• Bid Proposal & Bid Breakdown Form (as required)

• Bid Guaranty and Contract Bond

• Statement of Qualifications

• Corporate Affidavit

• Non-Collusion Affidavit

• Certificate of Compliance through ODAS (Bidder’s Certificate)

• Substitution List

• Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors


8

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS

1.0 Receipt of Bids

1.1 The Five Rivers MetroParks (FRMP) will receive sealed bid proposals for WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES Bid No. 20-003 until MARCH 3, 2020 at 11:00 a.m.., local time, at Five Rivers MetroParks Main Office, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374. The bids will be publicly opened and read aloud on MARCH 3, 2020 at 11:00 a.m. local time, at Five Rivers MetroParks Main Office, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374.

1.2 Each Bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Bid Manager, Five Rivers MetroParks, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374. Each sealed envelope containing a Bid must be plainly marked on the outside as “Bid for WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES, Bid No. 20-003” and the envelope should bear on the outside the Bidder’s name and address. If sent by mail or delivery service, the sealed envelope containing the Bid must be enclosed in an outer envelope addressed to the Bid Manager, Five Rivers MetroParks Main Office, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374. 2.0 Examination of Contract Documents and the Work Site

2.1 The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the work and the site survey

and site improvement design documentation. The Bidder, in submitting a Bid, warrants that they have investigated and are acquainted with the conditions to be encountered for performing the work including the character, quality, and quantities of work to be performed and materials to be furnished, the prevailing hourly wage rates for the area in which the project is located and the requirements of the Contract Documents hereinafter defined. It is mutually agreed that the Bidder has made such examination and is satisfied as to all the conditions which will affect the work.

2.2 Further submission of a Bid shall be considered evidence that the Bidder has

carefully examined the site of the proposed work and any available soils data, and is satisfied as to the nature of the subsurface conditions to be encountered in performing the work.

2.3 No pleas of ignorance of the Contract Documents, or of the conditions that exist, or

of conditions or difficulties, including subsurface conditions, that may be encountered in the execution of the work, as a result of failure to make such examination or investigation, will be accepted as an excuse for any failure or omission on the part of the Contractor to fulfill in every respect all of the requirements of the Contract, nor will the same be accepted as a basis for any claim whatsoever, for extra compensation, extra work, or for any extension of time.

3.0 Interpretation of Quantities in the Bid Proposal

3.1 The quantities shall be listed in the Bid Proposal. The item costs to be tendered by the Bidders are to be tendered expressly for the scheduled quantities and as they may be increased or decreased by duly authorized Change Orders. Payments, except for lump sum Bids, and except for lump sum items in the item cost Bids, will be made to the Contractor for the actual


9

quantities only if work performed or materials furnished will be in accordance with the Final Design Documents provided by the Contractor proposing to do the work.

4.0 Addenda

4.1 If any person contemplating submitting a Bid for the proposed Project is in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the Contract Documents, they may submit to the Owner’s Project Manager a written request for an interpretation thereof. The person submitting the request will be responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the Contract Documents will be made only by Addendum duly issued and a copy of such Addendum will be delivered electronically to each person receiving a set of Contract Documents or attending the Pre-Bid Meeting. Any such Addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents.

4.2 Potential bidders must provide a valid email address to receive addenda. Bidders are required to check the Five Rivers MetroParks bid management website for addenda prior to placing their bids. Addenda may be posted up to 72 hours prior to the Bid Time. Failure to acknowledge all addenda in the spaces provided on the Bid Proposal Form may be reason to reject a bid.

5.0 Modification and Withdrawal of Bid

5.1 Bids may be withdrawn at any time before the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids, but may not be modified and resubmitted. No bid or bid security may be withdrawn or modified after the scheduled closing time for receipt of bids for at least sixty (60) days except as provided in Section 9.31 of Ohio Revised Code. Bids may be held by FRMP for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days from the date of opening for the purpose of reviewing the Bids and investigating the qualifications of Bidders prior to the award of the Contract, unless a one week extension is made pursuant to Section 153.12 of the Ohio Revised Code.

6.0 Non-Collusion Affidavit

6.1 Each Bidder is required to execute and submit with his Bid a Non-Collusion Affidavit in order for his Bid to be considered complete.

7.0 Bid Proposal

7.1 All Bids must be made on the Bid Proposal Form (and Bid Breakdown Form, if included) contained in the Contract Documents. When requested, separate and distinct bids shall be required for labor and materials for each trade or kind of mechanical labor, employment, or business required for this project. All blank entries on the provided forms shall be filled. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in rejection of the Bid.

7.2 If an item in the Bid Proposal Form contains a choice to be designated by the

Bidder, the Bidder shall indicate their choice in accordance with the specifications for that particular item, and thereafter no further choice will be permitted.

7.3 The Bidder’s proposal must be signed in ink by the individual proprietor, by two or

more members of the partnership, by one or more members or officers of each firm representing a joint venture, or by one or more officers of a corporation, or by an agent of the Contractor


10

legally qualified and acceptable to the Owner. If the proposal is made by an individual, their name and business address must be shown; if as a joint venture, the name and business address of each member or officer of the firms represented by the joint venture must be shown; if by a corporation, the name of the state under the laws of which the corporation is chartered and the name and title of the officer or officers having authority under the by-laws to sign contracts, the name of the corporation and the business address of its corporate officials must be shown; or if by any other business entity the Owner shall require the names and address of the responsible officers of such interested persons or entities. Anyone signing a proposal as agent must file with it legal evidence of their authority to do so.

7.4 Before a contract will be awarded to a foreign corporation or a person or

partnership non-resident of the State of Ohio, such foreign corporation, person, or partnership non-resident shall file with the Secretary of State a power of attorney designating their or its agent for the Secretary of State, as agent for the purpose of accepting service of summons, in any action in law or equity, or both, brought in the State of Ohio.

7.5 Bid proposals will be considered informal, irregular, or defective and may be

rejected for the following reasons: (a) If the proposal is on a form other than that furnished; or if the form is altered or any

part thereof is detached. (b) If there are unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate bids, or irregularities of

any kind which may tend to make the proposal incomplete, indefinite, or ambiguous as to its meaning.

(c) If the bidder adds any provisions reserving the right to accept or reject an award, or

to enter into a contract pursuant to an award. (d) If the proposal does not contain a unit price, for each pay item listed.

8.0 Bid Guaranty

8.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by a Bid Guaranty payable to the Owner in the form of either:

(a) A Bond for the full amount of the Bid, with a corporate Surety approved by the

Owner. The Bid guaranty form included herein should be used. (b) A certified check for 10 percent of the Bid. (c) A cashier’s check for 10 percent of the Bid. (d) An irrevocable letter of credit for 10 percent of the Bid. 8.2 As soon as the Bids have been compared, the Owner will retain the Bid Guaranties

of the three lowest and best Bidders. All other Bid Guaranties will immediately expire. When the Contract is executed, or the period for holding the Bids has expired, the Bid Guaranties of the two remaining unsuccessful Bidders shall expire. Unsuccessful bidders may request return of the physical copy of their bid guaranty.


11

9.0 Statement of Qualifications

9.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by a Statement of Qualifications on the form provided in the Contract Documents in order for the Bid to be considered complete.

9.2 Responsive and responsible bidders must be able to demonstrate the required

experience by providing the following: Detailed descriptions, including client and regulatory references, as applicable, for a

minimum of three successfully completed projects that demonstrate the firm’s experience and expertise with the following project elements –

(a) Commercial construction (b) Food service construction 9.3 Each bidder shall provide detailed information for any project performed for which

the contract was terminated, or was not completed by the original contractor. Failure to disclose any such projects may be considered reason to reject a bid. 10.0 Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors for Specified Portions of the Work

10.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by a Sub-Contractor’s list on the form provided in the Contract Documents in order for the Bid to be considered complete. Each Sub-Contractor’s name, address and type of work to be performed shall be provided. No Sub-Contractor may be substituted with another subcontractor, or the Contractor’s own forces, without prior written approval from the Owner. 11.0 Bidder Investigation

11.1 The Owner may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. In determining the award, consideration will be given to (a) whether the Bidder maintains a permanent place of business, (b) suitability of the Bidder’s plant and equipment for the work, (c) Bidder’s financial status and organization, (d) Bidder’s record of lowest Bid. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Bidder fails to satisfy the Owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein.

11.2 In addition, the Owner reserves the right to disqualify or refuse to consider a Bid

Proposal if a Bidder is in default for any of the following reasons: (a) More than one proposal for the same work from an individual, firm, or corporation

under the same or different name, or corporation under the same name or corporation with one or more of the same persons as officers of such corporations, or corporations who are holding companies or holding companies which are subsidiaries of such corporations.

(b) Evidence of collusion among bidders.


12

(c) Bid prices which obviously are unbalanced. (d) Lack of competency, inadequate machinery, plant or other equipment, as

revealed by experience questionnaires required by this bid document. (e) Uncompleted work, whether or not with the Owner, which in the judgment of the

Owner, might hinder or prevent the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. (f) Failure to perform previous contracts adequately or a breach of prior contracts,

whether or not the breach was waived by the Owner at a prior time. (g) Any other reasonable cause. 11.3 Before any contract is awarded, the Bidder may be required to furnish a complete

statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any or all materials to be used in the construction of the work together with samples, which samples may be subjected to the tests provided for in these specifications to determine their quality and fitness for the work. 12.0 Combination or Conditional Proposals

12.1 If the Owner so elects, proposals may be requested for the project in combination and/or separately, so that bids may be submitted either on the combination or on separate units of the combination. The Owner reserves the right to make awards on combination bids or separate bids to the best advantage of the Owner. No combination bids, other than those specifically set upon the proposals, will be considered. Separate contracts will be written for each individual project included in the combination. 13.0 Contract Award and Execution

13.1 After the proposals are opened and read aloud, they will be compared on the basis of the summation of the products of the approximate quantities shown in the proposal by the total (sum of the labor and material) price. In the event of a discrepancy between the total (sum of labor and material) price and the extensions, the total (sum of labor and material) price shall govern. The Owner shall also determine any alternate Items as stipulated in the Bid Proposal to be performed and they will be included in above summation. The right is reserved to reject any or all proposals, to waive technicalities or to advertise for new proposals, if in the judgment of the Owner its best interests will be promoted thereby.

13.2 The award of the work, if it is awarded, will be made as soon as is reasonably

possible after the opening of the Bids to the lowest and best Bidder whose proposal complies with all the requirements prescribed. In no case will an award be made until all necessary investigations are made as to the responsibility of the Bidder to whom it is proposed to award the contract. No bid will be accepted if it exceeds the cost estimate by more than 10%.

13.3 The Owner reserves the right to rescind the award of the work at any time before

the execution of the Contract by all parties without incurring any liability. Therefore, if the Contractor changes its position, economically or otherwise, after receiving a verbal or written notice of award and in reliance upon the Owner executing the Contract, the Contractor agrees


13

to do so solely at its own risk and the Owner will not incur any liability from the contractor’s change of position.

13.4 The lowest and best Bidder to whom the work is awarded will be required to

execute the Contract and to furnish the required Contract Bond, Certificates of Insurance, and Personal Property Tax Affidavit within 10 calendar days from the date when Notice of Award is communicated in writing or orally to the Bidder. In case of failure of the Bidder to execute the Contract, the Owner may, at this option, consider the Bidder in default, in Section 153.54 of the Ohio Revised Code. The award may then be made to the next lowest and best Bidder, or the work may be re-advertised as the Owner may decide.

13.5 A Contract Bond in the amount of 100 percent of the Contract price, with a

corporate Surety approved by the Owner, will be required for the faithful performance of the Contract. The Contract Bond form included herein shall be used.

13.6 The Contract Bond furnished by the Contractor shall remain in effect until the

expiration of the one-year guarantee period as assurance of the guarantee herein stipulated. 13.7 All Bid Guaranty and Contract Bonds shall be signed by an authorized agent of an

acceptable Surety Bonding Company and by the Bidder. Surety Bonding Company bonds shall be supported by credentials showing the power of attorney of the agent, the Certificate showing the legal rights of the Bonding Company to do business in the State of Ohio and a financial statement of the surety. These supporting credentials need only be furnished by the successful Bidder upon the award of the work.

13.8 The lowest and best Bidder will further be required to furnish the Owner with a

complete breakdown of the lump sum Bid items to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer before signing the Contract. The lump sum breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to provide a check of claims for partial payments requests.

13.9 The Notice to Proceed shall be communicated in writing or orally to the Contractor

within 10 days of the execution of the Contract by the Owner. Should there be reasons why the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued within such period; the time may be extended by mutual Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 14.0 Personal Property Tax Affidavit

14.1 The lowest and best Bidder shall, after the award of the work but before the Contract is executed, submit to the Owner a Personal Property Tax Affidavit that they have not been charged at the time the Bid was submitted with any delinquent personal property taxes on the general tax list of personal property of any county in which the taxing district (Five Rivers MetroParks) has territory, or that such person was charged with delinquent personal property taxes on any such tax list, in which case the statement shall also set forth the amount of such due and unpaid delinquent taxes and any due and unpaid penalties and interest thereon. 15.0 Contractor’s Insurance Contractor’s Insurance: The Contractor and/or Subcontractor on this work will be required to take out and maintain during the life of this Contract, the insurance listed below, and approval of the insurance by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor


14

hereunder. The Contractor shall purchase the insurance listed below to protect the Owner and Owner’s Consultant from all claims incurred by the action of the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of this Project. The Contractor’s insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects Five Rivers MetroParks, its’ elected/appointed officials, employees and volunteers and that any insurance maintained by the Five Rivers MetroParks, its’ elected officials, employees or volunteers shall be excess to the contractor’s insurance and shall not contribute to it.

15.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance: (a) The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as will

protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s performance or obligations under the Contract Documents, whether due to action or inaction by the Contractor or any person for whom the Contractor is responsible.

(1) Claims under workers’ compensation, occupational sickness, or disease

disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts; (2) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, disease, illness, death or

personal injury, and other claims usually covered by bodily injury liability insurance; (3) Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of property and other

claims usually covered by property damage liability insurance. (b) A Commercial General Liability policy and Business Automobile Liability policy,

separately or combined, shall be maintained to provide insurance as set forth in Paragraph (a), (2) and (3) above.

(c) Such Commercial General Liability and Business Automobile Liability insurance may

be either Combined Single Limits or Split Limits as provided below. An Umbrella or Excess Liability policy may be used in combination with the Commercial General Liability and Business Automobile insurance to meet such limits.

(1) Contracts in the amount of $100,000 or less shall require coverage in the

amount of not less than $1 million general aggregate and per occurrence. (2) Contracts in excess of $100,000 but not more than $5 million shall require

coverage in the amount of not less than $3 million general aggregate and per occurrence. (3) Contracts exceeding the amount of $5 million shall require coverage in an

amount to be determined by Five Rivers MetroParks, but in no case less than $5 million general aggregate and per occurrence.

(4) Such policies shall be endorsed to provide that the General Aggregate Limit

applies separately to each of the insured Contractor’s projects. (d) If Commercial General Liability and Business Automobile Liability insurance is written

with Split Limits, the following minimum limits shall be provided.


15

(1) Contracts in the amount of $100,000 or less shall require coverage in the amount of not less than $500,000 for injures, including death, to one person, and $1 million per occurrence and $500,000 property damage.

(2) Contracts in excess of $100,000, but not more than $5 million shall require

coverage in the amount of not less than $1 million for injuries, including death, to one person, and $1 million per occurrence and $1 million property damage, together with and Umbrella or Excess Liability policy of not less than $2 million per occurrence.

(3) Contracts exceeding the amount of $5 million shall require coverage in an

amount to be determined by Five Rivers MetroParks, but in no event shall an Umbrella or Excess Liability limit of less than $4 million be acceptable, along with Commercial General Liability and Business Automobile Liability limits of not less than $1 million property damage.

(e) For any demolition, blasting, excavating, tunneling, shoring or similar operations, the

Contractor shall provide and maintain Property Damage Liability insurance with a limit of liability equal to such limit as specified in the application sections of Paragraphs C and D above.

15.2 Builder’s Risk – New Construction: (a) Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide

and maintain, during the progress of the Work and until the execution of the Certificate of Contract Completion by Five Rivers MetroParks, a Builder’s Risk insurance policy to cover all Work in the course of construction including false work, temporary buildings and structures and materials used in the construction process, stored on or off site, or while in transit. Such insurance shall be on a “Risk of Direct Physical Loss” form policy and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including, but not limited to, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, earthquake, tornado, lightning, explosion, breakage of glass, flood, collapse and water damage. It shall also include debris removal, demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirement, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Five Rivers MetroParks’ services and expenses required to limit further loss.

(1) Coverage must include provision to pay the reasonable extra costs of

expediting temporary and/or permanent repairs to, or permanent replacement of, damaged property. This shall include overtime wages and the extra cost of “express” or other means of rapidly transporting materials and supplies necessary to such repair or replacement.

(2) Such Builder’s Risk policy shall protect both the Contractor and Five Rivers

MetroParks from loss and provide coverage for materials in transit or stored off site and identified for the Project.

(3) Coverage for other perils may be required if specified in the Special

Conditions. (b) Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Builder’s Risk policy shall

be written in the amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Price, including landscaping, paving and other site work.

(c) The Builder’s Risk Policy shall specifically permit and allow for partial occupancy by

Five Rivers MetroParks prior to acceptance of the Project by Five Rivers MetroParks.


16

15.3 Builder’s Risk – Renovations: (a) When a Contractor is involved solely in the installation of materials and equipment

and not in new building construction, the Contractor shall purchase and maintain either a Builder’s Risk, Builder’s Risk – Renovations, or Installation Floater insurance policy. Such policy shall comply with the same general conditions set forth in Item 2 above.

15.4 Insurance Policy Requirements: (a) Each policy of insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the

Contractor shall name Five Rivers MetroParks as an additional insured and each policy and respective Certificate of Insurance shall expressly provide that no less than 90 days prior written notice shall be given to Five Rivers MetroParks in the event of material alteration, cancellation, non-renewal or expiration of the coverage contained in such policy or evidenced by such Certificate of Insurance.

(b) The Contractor shall furnish Five Rivers MetroParks a certified copy of any insurance

or additional insured endorsement required to be purchased or maintained by the Contract Documents. In no event shall any failure of Five Rivers MetroParks to demand a certified copy of any required insurance or insured endorsement be construed as a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to obtain insurance required to be purchased or maintained by the Contract Documents.

(c) All insurance shall be maintained in the required amounts, without interruption, from

the date of the execution of the Agreement until the date of approval of the Certificate of Contract Completion by Five Rivers MetroParks. Failure to maintain the required insurance during the time specified shall be just cause for termination of the Agreement.

(d) Insurance policies required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor

may include a reasonable loss deductible, which shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to pay in the event of loss.

(e) The prompt repair or reconstruction of the Work as a result of an insured loss or

damage shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and shall be accomplished at no additional cost to Five Rivers MetroParks.

15.5 Waivers of Subrogation: (a) Five Rivers MetroParks and the Contractor waive all rights against each other for

damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent of actual recovery of an insurance proceeds under any property insurance obtained pursuant to this Article or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Five Rivers MetroParks as fiduciary.


17

16.0 Prevailing Wage

16.1 The Contractor to whom the work is awarded will be required to pay laborers, workers, mechanics and other employees on the work under this Contract not less than the prevailing wage scale in accordance with Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code. The Payroll Information and Final Payroll Affidavit forms contained in the Contract Documents shall be filled out as specified in Section 38 of the General Conditions.

16.2 The State of Ohio Prevailing Wage Determination if applicable to this Project is

included as Appendix A - 17.0 Special Conditions and Supplemental Specifications

17.1 Special Conditions of the Contract, and Supplemental Specifications, when included, shall supplement and/or modify the General Conditions and General Requirements included herein and shall govern whenever there is a conflict in meaning. 18.0 Bonds Accompanying Bid To Be Executed By Authorized Surety

18.1 A bid shall be deemed non-responsive and shall be rejected if the bidder submits with his bond a bid guaranty, contract bond, payment bond, or combination of such bonds executed by a surety not licensed, or a surplus lines company not approved, by the Superintendent of insurance to execute such a bond in the State of Ohio. 19.0 Certificate of Compliance through ODAS

19.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by the bidder’s current Certificate of Compliance (COC) with applicable Federal and State affirmative action programs in order for the Bid to be considered complete. No contract shall be entered into unless the bidder possesses a valid certificate of compliance with affirmative action programs issued pursuant to Section 9.47 of the Ohio Revised Code. Refer to the following Ohio Department of Administrative Services website for COC requirements. http://das.ohio.gov/Divisions/EqualOpportunity/ConstructionCompliance/CertificateofCompliance.aspx

http://das.ohio.gov/Divisions/EqualOpportunity/ConstructionCompliance/CertificateofCompliance.aspx

http://das.ohio.gov/Divisions/EqualOpportunity/ConstructionCompliance/CertificateofCompliance.aspx


18

BIDDING FORMS DOCUMENTS TO ACCOMPANY BIDS

The Bidder shall be aware that the following fully executed documents are required in order for his bid to be considered and they must appear in the following order: 1. Documents to Accompany Bids 2. Bid Proposal Forms 3. Bid Guaranty 4. Statement of Qualifications 5. Corporate Affidavit 6. Non-Collusion Affidavit

7. EEO Certificate of Compliance 8. Substitution List 9. Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors for Specific Portions of the Work NOTE – Do not submit the entire bid specification book, only the above documents. Signature of Bidder Date: Firm Name: BY: Official Address: Title: Phone: Fax: Other Interested Persons NAME ADDRESS NAME ADDRESS NAME ADDRESS NAME ADDRESS The Bidder acknowledges the receipt of the following Addenda:


19

BID PROPOSAL

Bid No. 20-003 Date: Description of Project: WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL

KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES TO THE FIVE RIVERS METROPARKS, MONTGOMERY COUNTY, OHIO: The undersigned having familiarized themselves with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work, and with the Contract Documents, including Advertisement for Bids, Instruction to Bidders, General Conditions, General Specifications, Construction and Material Specifications, Special Provisions, Bid Proposal, Plans and Contract Forms on file in the office of the Executive Director, hereby propose to perform everything required to be performed and to provide and furnish all the labor, materials, necessary tools, expendable equipment and all utility and transportation service necessary to perform and complete in a workmanlike manner all work required for the construction and satisfactory completion of said improvement, all in accordance with the Contract Documents issued hereto, for the following prices to wit: Base Bid Amount Dollars in Numbers ($ ) Bid Alternate Total Amount Dollars in Numbers ($ ) Total Bid Amount Dollars in Numbers ($ ) *Total Bid Amount Dollars in Words *In case of discrepancy exists between the above amount as written in numbers and in words, the amount as written in words shall govern. Bidder’s Signature Bidder’s Printed Name Company Name


20

BID BREAKDOWN FORM

I tem No.

Descript ionEst imated Quantity

Unit Unit Price Item Total Price

1

ITEM 1 TOTAL 1Lump Sum

$ $

Item 1 Bid Amount

2

A (Mark 1) - SHELF UNIT, FIXED 5 Each $ $

B (Mark 2) - EXHAUST HOOD 1 Each $ $

C (Mark 3) - CONVECTION OVEN 1 Each $ $

D (Mark 5) - REACH IN FREEZER 1 Each $ $

E (Mark 6) - WORK TABLE, MOBILE 2 Each $ $

F (Mark 7) - VEGETABLE PREP SINK 1 Each $ $

G (Mark 9) - UTENSIL WASHING SINK 1 Each $ $

H (Mark 10) - UNDERCOUNTER DISHWASHER 1 Each $ $

I (Mark 11) - WALL CABINET 2 Each $ $

J (Mark 14) - UTILITY CART 1 Each $ $

K (Mark 18) SIX-BURNER RANGE 1 Each $ $

L (Mark 20) WASTE COLLECTOR 1 Each $ $

$

Item 2 Bid Amount

3 BID ALTERNATE NO. 02-Allowance for Field Changes 1Lump Sum

$ 1,000.00 $ 1,000.00

Item 3 Bid Amount

$

Base Bid - All work as shown and described in the Contract Documents

BID ALTERNATE NO. 01 - Delete purchase of kitchen equipment as shown on schedule below. Owner to provide and deliver equipment only for Bid Alternate items selected for delet ion. Contractor shall provide all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to fully install as shown in the Contract Documents, including all items necessary for mounting, leveling, and connection to ut ilit ies. The reference mark for each item matches the Equipment Schedule on Sheet Q101.

ITEM 2 TOTAL (This will be a deduct total. All items may not be selected)

(Include Items 1-3 Bid Amounts) PROJECT TOTAL BID AMOUNT


21

BID GUARANTY AND CONTRACT BOND (Section 153.571 Ohio Revised Code)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned as

principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound unto

Five Rivers MetroParks, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374,

hereinafter called the Obligee, in the penal sum of the dollar amount of the bid submitted by the

Principal to the Obligee on to undertake the project known as: WESLEYAN

METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES, Bid No. 20-003.

The penal sum referred to herein shall be the dollar amount of the Principal’s bid to the

Obligee, incorporating any additive or deductive alternate proposals made by the Principal on

the date referred to above to the Obligee, which are accepted by the Obligee. In no case shall

the penal sum exceed the amount of

($ ). (If the above line is left blank, the penal sum will be the full amount

of the Principal’s bid, including alternates. Alternatively, if completed, the amount stated must

not be less than the full amount of the bid, including alternates, in dollars and cents. A

percentage is not acceptable.) For the payment of the penal sum well and truly to be made, we

hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and

assigns.

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee accepts the bid of the Principal and the Principal fails to

enter into a proper Contract in accordance with bid plans, details, specifications and bills of

material; and in the event the Principal pays to the Obligee the difference not to exceed ten

percent (10%) of the penalty hereof between the amount specified in the bid and such larger

amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with the next lowest bidder to perform

the work covered by the bid; or in the event the Obligee does not award the Contract to the

next lowest bidder and resubmits the project for bidding, the Principal will pay the Obligee the

difference not to exceed ten percent (10%) of the penalty hereof between the amount specified

in the bid or the costs, in connection with the resubmission, of printing new contract documents,

required advertising, and printing and mailing notices to prospective bidders, whichever is less,

then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. If the Obligee

accepts the bid of the Principal and the Principal within ten (10) days after the awarding of the

Contract enters into a proper Contract in accordance with the bid, plans, details, specifications

and bills of material, which said Contract is made a part of this bond the same as though set forth

herein; and


22

IF THE SAID Principal shall well and faithfully perform each and every condition of such

contract; and indemnify the Obligee against all damage suffered by failure to perform such

contract according to the provisions thereof and in accordance with the plans, details

specifications and bills of material therefore; and shall pay all lawful claims of subcontractors,

materialmen and laborers, for labor performed and materials furnished in the carrying forward,

performing, or completing of said Contract; we agreeing and assenting that this undertaking shall

be for the benefit of any materialmen or laborer having a just claim, as well as for the Obligee

herein; then this obligation shall be void; otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect, it

being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims

hereunder shall in no event exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.

THE SAID Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or additions,

in or to the terms of the said Contract or in or to the plans or specifications therefore shall in any

wise affect the obligations of said Surety on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any

such modifications, omissions or additions, the terms of the Contract or to the work or to the

specifications.

SIGNED AND SEALED the day of , .

PRINCIPAL:

SURETY COMPANY ADDRESS:

BY:

Title:

SURETY: SURETY AGENT’S NAME & ADDRESS:

BY:


23

STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS In order to have his Bid considered, the Bidder shall set forth below the character of previous work done which is similar to that of the Contract Documents, references for such work, and such other detailed information as will enable the Owner to determine responsibility, including experience, skill, and financial standing. See Information for Bidders, Section 9 for specific information to be included. Use additional sheets as required.


24

CORPORATE AFFIDAVIT

(To be filled in and executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.)

STATE OF )

) SS:

COUNTY OF )

, being duly sworn, deposes and says that he

or she is Secretary of , a Corporation organized and existing

under and by virtue of the laws of the State of and having its principal

office at (street),

(city), (county), (state).

Affiant further says that he or she is familiar with the records, minute books and by-

laws of ;(Name of Corporation)

Affiant further says that ,(Name of Officer)

(Title of Officer) of the Corporation is duly authorized to sign the

contract for the construction of

for said Corporation by virtue of

(State whether a provision of by-laws or a resolution of the

Board of Directors. If by resolution, give date of adoption.)

Affiant


25

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT State of County of Project Name WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN

MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES Project Number Not Applicable BID Identification 20-003 Contractor , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is of , (sole owner, a partner, president, secretary, etc.) the party making the foregoing Bid: that such Bid is not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to put in a false or sham Bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any Bidder or anyone else to put in a sham Bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that said Bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication or conference with anyone to fix the Bid price of said Bidder or of any other Bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of such Bid price, or of that of any other Bidder, or to secure any advantage against the Owner awarding the contract or anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in such Bid are true; and, further, that said Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his Bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid and will not pay any fee in connection therewith, to any corporation, partnership, company, association, organization, Bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof, or to any other individual except to such person or persons as have a partnership or the financial interest with said Bidder in his general business. Signed: Contractor: Title: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2020 . Seal of Notary


26


27

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE All Bids shall include a current copy of Bidder’s Certificate of Compliance (COC) through the ODAS per the requirements of Section 9.47 of the Ohio Revised Code. Refer to paragraph 19.0 of the Information to Bidders. Insert copy of COC at this page.


28

SUBSTITUTION LIST All Bids shall be based upon the STANDARD specified or their EQUALS. Bidders desiring to make Substitutions for “STANDARD” specified or different methods of construction shall list the proposed Substitution or Methods below, together with the Base Bid: Brand, Make or Method Specified Substitution Add Deduct Change


29

PROPOSED USE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS FOR SPECIFIC PORTIONS OF THE WORK In order to have the Bid considered, a Bidder shall set forth in the same space provided below the name and street address of the Sub-contractors proposed to be used in the performance of the specific portions of the work set forth below. If no Sub-contractors are to be used on any item of work, state “None” in the Name column next to such item of work. Work to be Performed Name Street Address The attention of Bidders is directed to Section 32, of the General Conditions relating to subcontracting any portion of the work under the Contract.


30

CONTRACT FORMS


31

NOTICE OF AWARD TO: contname Date: noadate Project Description: WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES Bid No. 20-003 The Owner has considered the Bid submitted by you on MARCH 3, 2020, for the above described work in response to its Advertisement for Bids and Information for Bidders. You are hereby notified that your Bid has been accepted for items in the amount of: $CONTAMT You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Contract and to furnish the required Contract Bond, Certificate of Insurance and Personal Property Tax Affidavit within ten calendar days from the date of this notice to you. If you fail to execute said Contract and to furnish said Contract Bond within ten days from the date of this notice, said Owner will be entitled to consider all your rights arising out of the Owner’s acceptance of your Bid as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Guaranty subject to the liability as set forth in Section 153.64 of the Ohio Revised Code. The Owner will be entitled to such other rights as may be granted by law. The Owner reserves the right to rescind the award of the work at any time before the execution of the Contract by all parties without incurring any liability. Therefore, if you change your position, economically or otherwise, after receiving a verbal or written notice of award and in reliance upon the Owner executing the Contract, you agree to do so solely at your own risk and the Owner will not incur any liability from your change of position. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice of Award to the Owner. FIVE RIVERS METROPARKS BY: Joseph R. Zimmerman, Project Manager

ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE Receipt of the above Notice of Award is hereby acknowledged by ,

this day of, 2020.

Signed Name and Title

cc: Contractor’s Surety Surety’s Agent

(NOTE: R.C. 9.32 requires that the Surety and its Agent be given written notice by mail of the award of the contract.)


32

CONTRACT This Contract made as of this day of , 2020, by and between

Five Rivers MetroParks (hereinafter referred to as the “Owner”), and contname

(hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor”).

WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter stipulated

to be kept and performed, the Owner and the Contractor agree as set forth below:

Article I. Scope

The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials, supplies, tools, equipment,

labor and other services necessary for the construction and completion of WESLEYAN

METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES Bid No. 20-003 in

accordance with the requirements and provisions of the following Documents as well as

the Contract Documents as hereinafter defined and which are hereby made a part of

this Contract:

(a) Specifications, supplemental specifications, and drawings prepared or issued

by Five Rivers MetroParks dated JANUARY 24, 2020.

(b) Addendum(a). No(s). 1 dated ADNM1.

(c) Bidding requirements including Advertisement for Bids and Information for

Bidders.

(d) Bidding forms including Bid Guaranty, Non-Collusion Affidavit, Statement of

Qualifications, Bid Proposal Form, and Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors for Specific

Portions of the Work.

(e) Contract Forms and General Conditions including Contract, Contract Bond,

Personal Property Tax Affidavit, Certificates of Insurance, Notice of Award, Notice to

Proceed, Change Order, Affidavit of Payment, Payroll Information, General Conditions,

Supplemental General Conditions, Specifications, and Supplemental Specifications,

Drawings, and Prevailing Rates of Wages.


33

Article II. Time

(a) The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within

ten (10) calendar days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed. The work shall be

completed within 155 calendar days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed unless the

period for completion is extended otherwise by the Contract Documents.

(b) Failure to complete the work within the number of calendar days stated in

this Article, including extension granted thereto as determined by the General Conditions

made applicable to the Contract, shall entitle the Owner to deduct from the monies due

to the Contractor an amount equal to $150.00 for each calendar day of delay in the

completion of the work as liquidated damages for extended administrative expense; plus

$0.00 for each day worked beyond the Contract Completion Date, as liquidated

damages for extended construction inspection expense.

(c) Damages related to the Contractor’s failure to meet schedule milestones

shall be calculated as actual damages.

Article III. Payment

(a) Subject to additions and deductions by Change Order and quantities

actually performed, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for work in the manner and at

such times as set forth in the General Conditions, the sum of $CONTAMT .

(b) The Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract for

labor performed and for material delivered to the site of work and shall retain a

percentage as provided in the General Conditions applicable to the Contract.

This Contract shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors,

administrators, successors and assigns.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed or caused to be executed by their duly

authorized official this Contract in duplicate, each of which shall be deemed an original,

as of the year first written above.


34

ATTEST: FIVE RIVERS METROPARKS

BY:

Rebecca A. Benná, Executive Director

ATTEST: CONTRACTOR

BY:

TITLE:

DEPARTMENT OF FINANCE CERTIFICATE

It is hereby certified that the amount of $contamt required to meet the Contract,

Agreement, Obligation, Payment or Expenditure, for the above has been lawfully

appropriated, authorized or directed for such purpose, is in the Treasury or in the process

of collection to the credit of the Capital Projects Fund and is free from any obligation or

certification now outstanding.


BY:

William Tschirhart, Chief of Administration

Dated:


35

CONTRACT BOND AND MAINTENANCE BOND

(R.C. 153.57 – Not to be used if Bid Guaranty includes Contract Bond and Maintenance

Bond.)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned , as

principal, and , as Surety, are hereby held and firmly bound

into Five Rivers MetroParks as the Owner and obligee in the penal sum of

Dollars, ($ ) for the payment of which will

and truly be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors,

administrators, successors and assigns.

SIGNED: This day of , 20 .

THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that whereas the above named

principal did on the day of , 20 , enter into a Contract with

, which said Contract is made a part of this bond

the same as though set forth herein;

NOW THEREFORE, if the said shall well and

faithfully do and perform the things agreed by to be done and

performed according to the terms of said Contract, and shall pay all lawful claims of

subcontractors, materialmen, and laborers for labor performed and materials furnished in

the carrying forward, performing or completing of said Contract; we agreeing and

assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit of any materialmen or laborer

having a just claim, as well as for the obligee herein; then this obligation shall be void;

otherwise the same shall remain in full force and effect; it being expressly understood and

agreed that the liability of the surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no event

exceed the penal amount of the obligation as herein stated.

FURTHER, it is expressly understood and agreed that this Bond shall remain in full force and

effect and continue as a guarantee of workmanship and materials for a period of one (1)


36

year after completion of the Contract and final acceptance of the completed work by

the Owner.

The said Surety, hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifications, omissions or

additions, in or to the terms of the said contract or in or to the plans or specifications

therefore shall in any wise affect the obligations of said Surety on its bond, and hereby

waives notice of any such modifications, omissions or additions, in or to the terms of the

said contract, or in or to the plans or specifications therefore.

PRINCIPAL

BY:

TITLE:

SURETY

BY:

TITLE:

The Foregoing Bond is Approved:


BY:

Rebecca A. Benná, Executive Director

IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury Department’s most current list (Circular 50 as amended) and must not exceed the underwriting limitation. Surety companies must be authorized to transact business in the state where the project is located and shall furnish proof of such authorization with the Bid.


37

PERSONAL PROPERTY TAX AFFIDAVIT State of County of The undersigned, , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that I am (sole owner, partner, president, secretary, etc.) of , the party making the foregoing Bid and the party awarded the Contract by the Owner. Furthermore, I hereby affirm under oath, pursuant to Section 5719.042 of the Ohio Revised Code, that at the time the Bid was submitted, the above party (was) (was not) charged with delinquent personal property taxes on the General Tax List of Personal Property for Montgomery County, Ohio. If such charge for delinquent personal property tax exists on the General Tax List of Personal Property for Montgomery County, Ohio, the amount of such due and unpaid delinquent taxes, including due and unpaid penalties and interest shall be set forth below. In such case, a copy of this statement shall be transmitted by the Director of Finance to the County Treasurer within 30 days of the date it is submitted. Delinquent Personal Property Tax $ Penalties $ Interest $ Signed: Title: Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of , 20 . Notary Public


38

NOTICE TO PROCEED TO: contname Date: ntpdate

Project Description: Wesleyan MetroPark Adventure Central Kitchen Modifications and Upgrades, Bid No. 20-003

Location is: 2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd, Dayton OH 45417-9544. You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Contract dated, and you are to complete the work within 155 consecutive calendar days thereafter. The date of completion of all work is therefore COMPDATE. You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this Notice to Proceed to the Owner. Dated: ntpdate FIVE RIVERS METROPARKS BY:

Joseph R. Zimmerman, Project Manager Acceptance of Notice Receipt of the above Notice to Proceed is hereby acknowledged: BY: Signature Name: Printed Name Title: This day of , 2020 .


39

CHANGE ORDER

Order No.: Date: Agreement Date: contdate Name of Project: Wesleyan MetroPark Adventure Central Kitchen Modifications and Upgrades Owner: Five Rivers MetroParks Contractor: contname The following changes are hereby made to the Contract Documents: Change to Contract Price- Original Contract Price: $contamt Current Contract Price adjusted by previous Change Order: $ The Contract price due to this Change Order will be (increased) (decreased) by: $ The new Contract Price including this Change Order will be: $ Change to Contract Time- The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) by calendar days. The date for completion of all work will be . Requested by: contname Title Date Recommended by: Joseph R. Zimmerman, Project Manager Date Approved by: Rebecca A. Benná, Executive Director Date


40

PREVAILING RATES OF WAGES The prevailing wage rates change on a regular basis and it is the bidders’ responsibility to keep informed of these changes during the bidding process. Prevailing wage rates can be viewed either at Wage & Hour’s website http://www.com.ohio.gov/laws/ or at, Five Rivers MetroParks Main Office, 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor, Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374, Monday through Friday 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. local time. Please call the Owner’s Representative to schedule an appointment.

http://www.com.ohio.gov/laws/


41

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1.0 Conformity with Plans and Specifications 1.1 All work performed and all materials furnished shall be in close conformity with the lines, grades, cross sections, dimensions and material requirements, including tolerances, shown on the plans or indicated in the specifications. 1.2 In the event the Architect/Engineer finds the materials, or the finished product in which the materials are used, not within close conformity with the plans but that reasonably acceptable work has been produced, he shall then make a determination if the work shall be accepted and remain in place. In this event, the Architect/Engineer will document the basis of acceptance by contract modification which may provide for an appropriate adjustment in the contract price for such work or materials as he deems necessary to conform to his determination based on professional judgment. 1.3 In the event the Architect/Engineer finds the materials of the finished product in which the materials are used or the work is performed are not in close conformity with the plans and specifications and have resulted in an inferior or unsatisfactory product, the work or materials shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor. 1.4 Upon the order of the Architect/Engineer, failure of the Contractor to follow the order of the Architect/Engineer, pursuant to this section, shall give the Owner the unqualified right to supply the materials for the finished product and perform the labor to cause it to be performed and any and all expense chargeable thereto, directly or indirectly, shall be deducted or billed to the Contractor. 2.0 Schedules, Reports and Records 2.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs, progress schedules, payrolls, reports, estimates, records, and other data where applicable as required by the Contract Documents for the work to be performed. 2.2 Within 15 days after the execution of the Contract the Contractor shall submit construction progress schedules showing the proposed order in which to carry on the work, including dates at which the various parts of the work will start, the estimated date of completion for each part, and as applicable: (a) The dates at which special detail drawings will be required. (b) Respective dates for submission of shop drawings, the beginning of manufacture, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies, and equipment. 2.3 If the Contractor’s operations are materially affected by changes in the plan or in the amount of the work, or if they have failed to comply with the approved schedule, the Contractor shall submit a revised progress schedule, if requested by the Architect/Engineer, which shall show a proposal to prosecute the balance of the work. The Contractor shall submit the revised progress schedule within ten days after the date of the request.


42

2.4 The Contractor shall incorporate into every progress schedule submitted any Contract requirements regarding the order of performance of portions of the work. The Contractor shall use all practicable means to make the progress of the work conform to that shown on the progress schedule which is in effect. Should the prosecution of the work, for any reason, be discontinued, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of resuming operations. 2.5 The Contractor shall submit one copy of a current program schedule with each request for payment. Failure to submit an updated, realistic and accurate progress schedule will be sufficient cause for the Architect/Engineer to decline to approve the request for payment. In the event the Architect/Engineer determines that the Contractor is behind schedule and may be subject to liquidated damages for delay, the Architect/Engineer will deduct from the Contractor’s request for payment such sum as the Architect/Engineer estimates may be reasonable for such liquidated damages. If the progress is improved and the Architect/Engineer estimates that the Contractor is back on schedule, the liquidated damages will be released in a subsequent request for payment. 2.6 The Contractor shall also submit a proposed schedule of payments that is anticipated will be earned during the course of work. 2.7 Whenever the work accomplished to date deviates from the latest construction progress schedules, the Contractor shall submit revised construction progress schedules indicating the work accomplished to date and the work to be done. When the work to be done is behind schedule, the Contractor shall include the necessary remedial measures to put the work on schedule. 3.0 Architect/Engineer’s Authority 3.1 The Architect/Engineer shall act as the Owner’s Representative during the construction period, and shall decide questions which may arise as to quality and acceptability of materials furnished and work performed. The Architect/Engineer shall interpret the intent of the Contract Documents in a fair and unbiased manner, and will make periodic visits to the site and determine if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 For projects where the Owner does not employ an Architect/Engineer during the construction phase, the term “Architect/Engineer” shall mean the “Owner’s Project Manager,” within the limits imposed by state law on the practice of architecture or engineering. 3.3 The Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for the construction means, controls, techniques, sequences, procedures, or constructions safety. 3.4 The Architect/Engineer has immediate charge of the details of each construction project and is responsible for the administration and satisfactory completion of the project. The Architect/Engineer has the authority to reject defective material and to suspend any work that is being improperly performed. 3.5 The Architect/Engineer will have the authority to suspend the work wholly or in part due to the failure of the Contractor to correct conditions unsafe for the workers or the general public, for failure to carry out provisions of the Contract, for failure to carry out orders, and for such period as may be deemed necessary due to unsuitable weather. The suspension of the


43

work for the above reasons does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility according to Section 11 of these General Conditions. 3.6 In the event the Architect/Engineer orders the work suspended for unsafe conditions, whether they be unsafe to workers or the public, or unsuitable weather, use of defective material not in conformity with the specifications or because work is being improperly performed, the expense, whether direct or indirect for such suspension shall be borne solely by the Contractor. 4.0 Owner’s Inspector 4.1 Inspectors employed by the Owner will be authorized to inspect all work done and materials furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation, fabrication or manufacture of the materials to be used. The Inspector is not authorized to alter or waive the provisions of the Contract, but shall have the authority to reject materials which do not meet specification requirements or suspend the portion of the work involved until any question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Architect/Engineer. The Inspector is not authorized to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications, or to act for the Contractor. 5.0 Inspection and Testing 5.1 All materials and equipment used in the construction of the Project shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards, as required and defined in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The Owner shall provide all inspection and testing services not required by the Contract Documents. 5.3 The Contractor shall provide all the testing and inspection services required by the Contract Documents. 5.4 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any work to specifically be inspected, tested, or approved by someone other than the Contractor, the Contractor will give the Architect/Engineer timely notice or readiness. The Contractor will then furnish the Architect/Engineer the required certificates of inspection, testing, or approval. 5.5 Inspections, tests or approvals by the Architect/Engineer or others shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 5.6 The Architect/Engineer and their representatives will at all times have access to the work. In addition, authorized representatives and agents of the Owner and any participating federal or state agency shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records. The Contractor will provide proper facilities for such access and observation of the work and also for any inspection or testing thereof.


44

5.7 If any work is covered, contrary to the written instructions of the Architect/Engineer, it must be uncovered for the Architect/Engineer’s observation and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 5.8 If the Architect/Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered work be inspected or tested by others, the Contractor at the Architect/Engineer’s request, will uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as the Architect/Engineer may require, that portion of the work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools, and equipment. If it is found that such work is defective, the Contractor will bear all the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such work is not found to be defective, the Contractor may be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, and reconstruction and an appropriate Change Order may be issued. 6.0 Correction of Work 6.1 Unacceptable work, whether the result of poor installation, nonconformity with Contract Documents, use of defective materials, damage through carelessness or any other cause, found to exist prior to the final acceptance of the work, shall be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable manner by the Contractor. The Contractor shall bear the expense of all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. 6.2 Work done contrary to the instructions of the Architect/Engineer, work done beyond the lines shown on the plans, or any extra work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. 6.3 If the Contractor does not comply with any reasonable order of the Architect/Engineer under the provisions of this section within 10 days after receipt of written notice, the Owner will have authority to cause unacceptable work to be remedied at the expense of the Contractor. 6.4 The corrections of all items shall be completed in all respects within thirty (30) days after the date of Substantial Completion unless specifically noted otherwise. If punch list items are not completed or corrected by this date, the Owner has the right to perform the work by other means and the cost of the same will be charged against the Contractor originally responsible for the work. 6.5 If more than one inspection by the Architect/Engineer is required for the purpose of evaluating punch list items to be completed or corrected, such inspection will be performed at the Contractor’s expense. 7.0 Surveys, Permits, Regulations, Land and Right-of-Way 7.1 The Owner shall establish control points for locating the principal component parts of the work together with a suitable number of bench marks adjacent to the work as shown in the Contract Documents. From the information provided by the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for


45

construction such as slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations and other working points, lines, elevations, and cut sheets. 7.2 Permits, fees and licenses for all work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor unless otherwise specified or required during process. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in these Contract Documents. 7.3 Prior to the closure of or working in or on any portion of a park road the Contractor shall obtain a permit from the Owner. Permits, as required, shall be obtained by the Contractor from the appropriate government entity prior to working on or in any public street. 7.4 Prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Owner shall obtain all land and rights-of-way necessary for carrying out and for the completion of the work to be performed pursuant to the Contract Documents, unless otherwise mutually agreed. 8.0 Maintenance of the Work Site 8.1 The Contractor shall obtain the permission of the Owner before placing or maintaining any temporary facilities on the Owner’s property or that of an adjacent landowner. 8.2 The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, a suitable spill area away from the Owner’s property for the disposal of waste materials and rubbish. 8.3 The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the construction area free from accumulations of waste material and rubbish, and shall, prior to the completion of the work, and at other times as required by the Owner or Architect/Engineer, remove from and about the work area and the adjacent premises, all such waste material and rubbish. 9.0 Laws to be Observed 9.1 The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all Federal, Ohio, and all applicable County and City laws, ordinances, and regulations and all orders and decrees of authorities having any jurisdiction or authority, which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the work, or which in any way affect the conduct of work. The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all such laws, ordinances, regulations, orders, and decrees; and shall protect and indemnify the Owner and its representatives against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order or decree, whether by himself or his employees. 9.2 The Contractor, subcontractor and their employees shall not permitted carry any weapons on the job site whether they are legally permitted to do so or not under ORC 2923. 10.0 Federal Aid Provisions 10.1 When the United States Government pays all or any portion of the cost of a project, the Federal laws and the rules and regulations made pursuant to such laws must be observed by


46

the Contractor and the work shall be subject to the inspection of the appropriate Federal Agency. 10.2 Such inspection shall in no sense make the Federal Government a party to this contract and will in no way interfere with the rights of either party hereunder. 11.0 Responsibility for Damage Claims 11.1 The Contractor and Surety shall save harmless the Owner and all of its representatives from all suits, actions, or claims of any character brought on account of any injuries or damages sustained by any person or property in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work or through the use of unacceptable materials in the construction of the improvement or on account of any act or omission, by the Contractor, or their agents and they shall pay any judgment obtained or growing out of any claims or suits. 12.0 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work 12.1 Until final written acceptance of the project by the Owner, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall take every precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by the action of the elements, from vandalism or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof except damage to the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to acts of God, of the public entity or governmental authorities. 12.2 The Contractor shall not suspend the work unless approved by the Architect/Engineer and in such cases under the provisions of Section 20 of these General Conditions, the Contractor shall be responsible for the project and shall take such precautions as may be necessary to prevent damage to the project, provide for adequate drainage and shall erect any necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at his expense. During such period of suspension or work, the Contractor shall properly and continuously maintain in an acceptable growing condition all living material in newly-established plantings, seedings, and soddings furnished under its Contract, and shall take adequate precautions to protect new tree growth and other important vegetative growth against injury. 13.0 Supervision by Contractor 13.1 The Contractor will supervise and direct the work and is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences, and procedures of construction. The Contractor will employ and maintain on the work a qualified supervisor or superintendent who shall have been designated in writing by the Contractor as the Contractor’s representative at the site. The supervisor shall have full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor and all communications given to the supervisor shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The supervisor shall be present and on the site at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and coordination of the work.


47

14.0 Personal Liability of Public Officials 14.1 In carrying out any of the provisions of these specifications, or in exercising any power or authority granted to them by or within the scope of the Contract, there shall be no liability upon the Owner or authorized representatives, either personally or as officials of the Owner, it being understood that in all such matters they act solely as agents and representatives of the Owner. 15.0 Non-Waiver of Legal Rights 15.1 Neither the inspection by the Architect/Engineer, nor by any duly authorized representatives, nor any order, measurements, or certificates by the Owner, or said representatives, nor any order by the Owner for the payments of money, nor any payment for, nor acceptance of any work by the Owner, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the Owner or its duly authorized representatives, shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this Contract, or of any power herein reserved to the Owner, or any right to damages herein provided; nor shall any waiver of any breach of this Contract be held to be a waiver of any other subsequent breach. 16.0 O.S.H.A. Compliance 16.1 All Contractors shall comply with the provisions of the Occupation, Safety and Health Act of 1972 and subsequent amendments and regulations thereto. 17.0 Changes in the Work 17.1 The Owner may at any time, as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the work without invalidating the Contract. If such changes increase or decrease the amount due under the Contract Documents, or in the time required for performance of the work, an equitable adjustment may be authorized by Change Order. 17.2 The Architect/Engineer also may, at any time, by issuing a Field Order, make changes in the details of the work. The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any changes in the work so ordered by the Architect/Engineer unless the Contractor believes that such Field Order entitles them to a change in Contract Price or Time, or both, in which event they shall give the Architect/Engineer Written Notice thereof within 7 days after the receipt of the ordered change. Thereafter, the Contractor shall document the basis for the change in Contract Price or Time within 30 days. The Contractor shall not execute such changes until the Contractor receives an executed Change Order approved by the Owner. 18.0 Changes in Contract Price 18.1 The Contract price may be changed only by a Change Order. The value of any work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the Contract Price shall be determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of precedence listed below: (a) Item prices previously approved. (b) An agreed lump sum.


48

(c) The actual cost, plus allowable markups, as described in Section 23.0, “Extra Work and Force Account Work.” 18.2 All contract price changes shall be approved by the Owner. 19.0 Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages 19.1 The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract Documents and Notice to Proceed. 19.2 The Contractor will proceed with the work at such a rate of progress to ensure full completion within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the Contract Time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the work. 19.3 If the Contractor shall fail to complete the work within the Contract Time, or extension of time granted by the Owner, then the Contractor will pay to the Owner the amount of liquidated damages as specified in the Contract for each calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract Documents. 19.4 The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when the delay in completion of the work is due to the following and the Contractor has promptly given Written Notice of such delay to the Owner or Architect/Engineer: (a) To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Owner. (b) To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to, acts of God, or the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the performance of a contract with the Owner, fires floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and abnormal and unforeseeable weather. 19.5 In addition to liquidated damages, the Contractor shall be liable for all expenses incurred by the Owner by reason of the Contractor’s default, including judgments awarded to others, reasonable attorneys’ fees and all expenses of administration and inspection after the date set for completion. 19.6 The Owner shall have the right to deduct all or any unpaid balance from liquidated damages or other expenses from any money due or to become due to the Contractor. The amount still owing, if any after such deduction, shall be paid on demand by the Contractor or their Surety. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor or their Surety from any other obligations under this contract. It is also expressly agreed that the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for all damages from their failure to complete the work within the time limit fixed. 20.0 Suspension of Work, Termination and Delay 20.1 The Owner may suspend the work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than 90 days or such further time as agreed upon by the Contractor, by Written Notice to the


49

Contractor and the Architect/Engineer which notice shall fix the date on which work shall be resumed. The Contractor will resume the work on the date so fixed. The Contractor may be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension. 20.2 If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt, or if they should make a general assignment for the benefit or their creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of their insolvency, or if they should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extensions of time are provided and then only for much time, to supply enough properly skilled workers or materials, or if they should fail to make payments to Subcontractors or for material or labor, so as to affect the progress of the work, or persistently be in violation of a substantial requirement of the Contract, or be in violation of Ohio law, the Owner, may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and their Surety ten days’ written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, equipment and other facilities installed on the work and paid for by the Owner and finish the work by whatever method it may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner as herein provided, and the damage incurred through the Contractor’s default, shall be certified by the Architect/Engineer. 20.3 Where the Contract has been terminated by the Owner, said termination shall not affect or terminate any of the rights of the Owner as against the Contractor or their surety then existing or which may thereafter accrue because of such default. Any retention or payment of monies by the Owner due the Contractor under the terms of the Contract, shall not release the Contractor or their surety from liability for their default. 20.4 After 10 days from delivery of Written Notice to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, elect to terminate the Contract. In such case, the Contractor shall be paid for all Work executed and any expense sustained plus reasonable profit, unless such termination was due to the act or conduct of the Contractor. 20.5 If, through no act or fault of the Contractor, the work is suspended for a period of more than 90 days by the Owner or under an order of a Court or other public authority, or the Architect/Engineer fails to act on any request for payment within 30 days after it is submitted, or the Owner fails to pay the Contractor substantially the sum approved by the Architect/Engineer or awarded by arbitrators within 30 days of its approval and presentation, then the Contractor may, after 10 days from delivery of a Written Notice to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and all expenses sustained. In addition and in lieu of terminating the Contract, if the Architect/Engineer has failed to act on a request for payment or if the Owner has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, the Contractor may upon 10 days Written Notice to the Owner and the Architect/Engineer stop the work until they have been paid all amount then due, in which event and upon resumption of the work, Change Orders shall be issued for adjusting the Contract Price or extending the Contract Time or both to compensate for the costs and delays attributable to the stoppage of the work.


50

20.6 If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended, delayed, or interrupted as a result of a failure of the Owner or Architect/Engineer to act within the time specified in the Contract Documents, or if no time is specified within a reasonable time, an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time, or both, may be made by Change Order to compensate the Contractor for the costs and delays necessarily caused by the failure of the Owner or Architect/Engineer. 21.0 Scope of Payment 21.1 The Contractor shall receive and accept compensation provided for in the Contract as full payment for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment for performing all work under the Contract in a complete and acceptable manner and for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever character arising out of the nature of the work or the prosecution thereof, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 22.0 Compensation for Altered Quantities 22.1 When the accepted quantities of work vary from the quantities in the bid schedule, the Contractor shall accept as payment in full, so far as Contractor items are concerned, payment at the original contract item prices for the accepted quantities or work done. No allowance except as provided in General Conditions will be made for any increased expense, loss of expected reimbursement, or loss of anticipated profits suffered or claimed by the Contractor resulting either directly from such alterations or indirectly from unbalanced allocation among the Contract items of overhead expense on the part of the bidder and subsequent loss of expected reimbursements therefore or from any other cause. 22.2 Increased work involving supplemental agreements shall be paid for as stipulated in such agreements. The Contractor shall furnish substantiating data required in the preparation of these agreements. 23.0 Extra Work and Force Account Work 23.1 The Contractor shall perform unforeseen work, for which there is no price included in the Contract, whenever it is deemed necessary or desirable in order to complete fully the work as contemplated. Such work shall be performed in accordance with the specifications and as directed by the Owner. 23.2 Extra work performed in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Owner will be paid for at the item prices or lump sum stipulated in the order authorizing the work, or the Owner may require the Contractor to do such work on a force account basis to be compensated in the following manner: (a) Labor. For all labor and for all supervisors in direct charge of the specific operations, the Contractor shall receive the rate of wage and fringe benefits currently in effect at the time the work is performed for each and every hour that said labor and supervisors are actually engaged in such work, to which may be added an amount equal to 30 percent of the sum thereof. The term fringe benefits shall be defined as the actual costs paid to, or in behalf of, workers by reason of health and welfare benefits, pension fund benefits or other benefits, when such amounts are required by collective bargaining agreement or other employment contract generally applicable to the classes of labor employed on the work. In addition to the above, the


51

contractor shall receive the actual cost of Social Security Tax, Workers’ Compensation and State and Federal Unemployment Insurance. In lieu of itemizing these four items, 15 percent of the sum of wages and fringe benefits may be added. The wages of any supervisor or timekeeper who is employed partly on force account work and partly in other work, shall be prorated between two classes of work according to the number of workers employed on each class of work as shown by the payrolls. The Contractor shall receive the actual costs paid for subsistence and travel allowances when such payments are required by collective bargaining agreement or other employment contract generally applicable to the classes of labor employed on the work. No percentage may be added to these costs. (b) Materials. For materials accepted by the Architect/Engineer and used, the Contractor shall receive the actual cost of such materials delivered on the work, including transportation charges paid by him (exclusive of machinery rentals as hereinafter set forth), to which cost 15 percent may be added. (c) Equipment. For any machinery or special equipment other than small tools which it may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a rental price to be agreed upon in writing before such work is begun, for the time that such work is begun, for the time that such equipment is in use on the work. No profit or overhead shall be added to any charges in connection with the use of owned equipment, however, 15 percent of the basic amount payable for rented equipment may be added for overhead and profit. Proper invoices will be required for rental equipment. (d) Supervisor’s Transportation. A flat hourly rate, which includes fuel and lubricants, profit and overhead, and any other costs, will be allowed for the supervisor’s transportation. (e) Fuel and Lubricants. For all equipment except the supervisor’s transportation (for which an all-inclusive flat rate is allowed), 15 percent of the basic equipment allowance may be added for cost of fuel and lubricants. (f) Subcontract Work. For work performed by an approved Subcontractor the prime Contractor will be allowed an amount to cover administrative costs, equal to 5 percent of the compensation provided in (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) but not exceeding $5,000.00. (g) Compensation. The compensation to the Contractor as above provided in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f) shall constitute payment in full for extra work done on a force account basis including administration, superintendence, overhead, use of tools and equipment for which no rental is allowed, profit, taxes other than sales tax, premium on insurance, and any other expense incidental to performing the force account work. Sales tax will not be allowed on any item for which tax exemption may be obtained. (h) Statements. Final payment will not be made for work performed on a force account basis until the Contractor has furnished the Architect/Engineer with itemized statements of the cost of such force account work detailed as follows:


52

(1) Name, Classification, date, daily hours, total hours, rate and extension for each laborer and supervisor. (2) Designation, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, and extension for each unit of machinery and equipment. (3) Quantities of materials, prices, and extensions. (4) Transportation of materials. 23.3 The Contractor’s representative and the Architect/Engineer shall compare records daily of the cost of work done as ordered on a force account basis. The Architect/Engineer shall certify that these records are correct. 23.4 Statements shall be accompanied and supported by proper invoices for all materials used and transportation charges, and rented equipment performing work on force account operations. However, if materials used on the force account work are not specifically purchased for such work but are produced by the Contractor or taken from the Contractor-stock, then in lieu of the invoices the Contractor shall furnish an affidavit certifying that such materials were produced by him or taken from his stock, that the quantity claimed was actually used, and that the price and transportation claimed represent the actual cost to the Contractor. Statements shall be filed not later than the 20th day of the month following that in which the work was actually performed. 23.5 The above described force account provision will also apply to work performed at agreed unit prices and agreed lump sums when the agreed prices are based on analyses of cost of labor, material and equipment. 24.0 Eliminated Items 24.1 Should any items contained in the proposal be found unnecessary for the proper completion of the work, the Owner may, upon written order to the Contractor, eliminate such items from the Contract, and such action shall in no way invalidate the Contract. When a Contractor is notified of the elimination of items, all costs incurred will be reimbursed for actual work completed , including mobilization of materials prior to said notification.


53

25.0 Claims for Adjustment and Disputes 25.1 If, in any case, the Contractor believes that additional compensation is due for work or material not clearly covered in the Contract, or not ordered by the Owner as extra work, as defined herein, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of their intention to make claim for such additional compensation before beginning the work on which the claim is based. If such notification is not given, and the Owner is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as required, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive any claim for such additional compensation. Such notice by the Contractor, and the fact that the Owner has kept account of the cost as aforesaid shall not in any way be construed as proving or substantiating the validity of the claim. If the claim, after consideration by the Owner, is found to be just, it will be paid as extra work as provided herein for force account work. Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as establishing any claim contrary to the terms of Sections 17 and 18 of these General Conditions. 26.0 Payments to Contractor 26.1 Partial payments to the Contractor for labor performed shall be made at the rate of ninety-two percent (92%) of the estimates prepared by the Contractor and approved by the Architect/Engineer. All labor performed after the project is fifty percent (50%) completed shall be paid for at the rate of one hundred percent (100%) of the estimates submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect/Engineer thirty (30) days after the date of the approved estimate. In addition to all other payments made to the Contractor on account of work performed, the Owner shall pay the Contractor a sum at the rate of ninety two percent (92%) of the invoice costs, for material delivered to the site of the work, provided such materials have been inspected and found to meet the specifications. After the project is fifty percent (50%) completed the balance of such invoiced value shall be paid when such material is incorporated into and becomes a part of the work. Payment on approved estimates filed with the Owner shall be made within thirty (30) days. All retained funds after fifty percent (50%) completion shall be deposited in an escrow account with one or more banks or building and loan associations in the state selected by mutual agreement between the Contractor and the Owner at the time the contract is executed. The sums retained by the Owner under this section shall be held by the Owner until completion of the entire work and shall be held by the Owner as guarantee of the performance by the Contractor of all conditions contained in their contract. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in the opening of the escrow account and shall accompany the Owner’s representatives for such purpose to the financial institution of their mutual choice. 26.2 The request for payment may also include an allowance for the cost of such major materials and equipment which are suitably stored either at or near the site. 26.3 Prior to Substantial Completion, the Owner, with the approval of the Architect/Engineer and with the concurrence of the Contractor, may use any completed or substantially completed portions of the work. Such use shall not constitute an acceptance of such portions of the work. 26.4 The Owner shall have the right to enter the premises for the purpose of doing work not covered by the Contract Documents. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of the work, or the restoration of any damaged work except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Owner.


54

26.5 Upon completion of the work, the Architect/Engineer shall issue a letter attached to the final payment request, recommending that the work be accepted by the Owner. The entire balance found to be due the Contractor, including the retained percentages with accumulated interest, but except such sums as may be lawfully retained by the Owner, shall be paid to the Contractor within 30 days of completion and acceptance of the work by the Owner. 26.6 The Contractor will indemnify and save the Owner or the Owner’s agents harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demand of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, tools, and all supplies, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of the work. 26.7 The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, either prior to or concurrently with the final estimate, the Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment listing all suppliers of material and all persons performing labor under and by virtue of this Contract. The Contractor shall also supply, at this time, waivers of mechanics’ liens from all material suppliers and all persons performing labor as listed in the Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining from their subcontractors the Affidavits of Payment and waivers of mechanic’s liens for the subcontractors’ portion of the work. If the Contractor fails to do so the Owner may, after having notified the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold from the Contractor’s unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to the Contractor shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to either the Contractor, their surety, or any third party. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract Documents by the Owner to the Contractor and the Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any such payments made in good faith. 27.0 Acceptance of Final Payments as Release 27.1 The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate as a release to the Owner of all claims and all liability to the Contractor, their subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. Any payment, however, final or otherwise, shall not release the Contractor, their subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns or their sureties from any obligations under the Contract Documents. 28.0 Contract Security 28.1 The Contractor shall within 10 days after the receipt of the Notice of Award furnish the Owner with a Contract Bond, if applicable, in penal sums equal to the amount of the Contract price, conditioned upon the performance by the Contractor of all undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions, and agreements of the Contract Documents, and upon the prompt payments by the Contractor to all persons supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided by the Contract Documents. Such Bond shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding company licensed to transact such business in the state in which the work is to be performed and named on the current list of “Surety Companies Acceptable on Federal Bonds” as published in underwriting limitation. The expense of this Bond shall be borne by the Contractor. If at any time a Surety on any such Bond as declared bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed or is removed from the list of Surety Companies accepted on federal Bonds, Contractor shall, within 10 days after the happening of


55

any of the above eventualities, substitute an acceptable Bond or (bonds) in such form and sum and signed by such other Surety or Sureties and may be satisfactory to the Owner. The premiums on such Bond shall be paid by the Contractor. No further payments shall be deemed due nor shall be made until the new Surety or Sureties shall have furnished an acceptable Bond to the Owner. 29.0 Assignments 29.1 Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose of the Contract or any portion thereof, or of their right, title or interest therein, or their obligations thereunder, without written consent of the other party. 30.0 Indemnification 30.1 The Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect/Engineer and their officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses including attorneys’ fees arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work; provided that any such claims, damage, loss or expense is attributable to (i) bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or (ii) the risk of injury to tangible property, or the injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting there from, and is caused in whole or in part by any negligent or willful act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 30.2 In any and all claims against the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, or any of their agents or employees, by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. 30.3 The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Architect/Engineer, their agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps, plans, opinions, reports surveys, change orders, designs or specifications. 31.0 Patented Devices, Materials and Process 31.1 If the Contractor employs any design, device, material, or process covered by letters of patent or copyright, they shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner. The Contractor and the Surety shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, any affected third party, or political subdivision from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design, device, material or process or any trademark or copyright, and shall indemnify the Owner for any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay by reason of any infringement, at any time during the prosecution or after the completion of the work. 32.0 Subcontractors 32.1 The “Proposed Use of Sub-Contractors for Specific Portions of the Work” bid form shall be a basis for evaluating Bids. No Bid shall be considered by the Owner unless said form form


56

is completed and submitted with the Bid. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all proposed subcontractor(s) listed thereon before the Bid is awarded. However, the Owner shall give the Bidder an opportunity to: either (a) withdraw the Bid or (b) substitute subcontractors who are acceptable to the Owner provided such substitution of subcontractors does not change the amount of the Bid. The Owner shall not reject any such listed subcontractor(s) after the contract award has been made by the Owner. 32.2 The contractor shall not, without the written permission and approval of the Owner, subcontract any additional portions of the work to be performed under this Contract. 32.3 In the event that the Contractor desires to subcontract additional portions of the work, or perform with the Contractor’s own forces work previously listed to be subcontracted, they shall first submit to the Owner a statement showing the nature of the work to be re-assigned, and the name and street address of the party or parties to whom it is proposed to be re-assigned. The decision of the Owner as to its approval shall be final and binding. 32.4 The approval of subcontractor(s) by the Owner shall not directly or indirectly release or modify the responsibility of the Contractor for the satisfactory and entire completion of the work under this Contract, and each and every part, and portion thereof. 32.5 In case any party or parties to whom any work under this Contract shall have been subcontracted shall disregard the direction of the Architect/Engineer or their duly authorized representatives, or shall furnish any unsatisfactory work or shall fail or refuse in any way to conform to any of the conditions of this Contract, then, in that case, upon written order of the Architect/Engineer the Contractor shall require said party or parties in default to discontinue any work under this Contract. 32.6 Any defective work performed by a subcontractor shall be removed and replaced with work which is satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and without cost to the Owner. 32.7 Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the Owner. 32.8 The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a list of names and telephone numbers of the designated employees for each subcontractor to be contacted in case of emergency during non-working hours. A copy of this list shall also be displayed on the job site. 33.0 Guaranty 33.1 The Contractor shall guarantee that the work is free from all defects due to faulty materials or installation for a period of one (1) year from the date of Final Acceptance of the work by the Owner. This guaranty period shall be covered by the Bid Guaranty and Contract Bonds. The Contractor shall, during the life of this guaranty promptly make all repairs or changes in the work which, in the opinion of the Engineer are necessary as a result of defects due to faulty materials or installation. The Owner shall give the Contractor notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event that the Contractor should fail to make the necessary repairs or changes, the Owner may do so, and the Contractor and their Surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred by the Owner in making said repairs or changes.


57

34.0 Dispute Resolution 34.1 Contractor and Owner agree to discuss, in good faith, Alternative Dispute Resolution procedures as a process for resolving disputes, in the event any dispute arising under the Contract is not resolved by Owner and Contractor within 30 days after it first arises. 35.0 Taxes 35.1 The Contractor hereby further agrees to withhold all applicable city income taxes due or payable for wages, salaries, and commission paid to its employees and further agrees that any of its subcontractors shall be required to agree to withhold any such applicable city income taxes due for services performed under this Contract. 36.0 Nondiscrimination in Employment

36.1 In connection with the performance of work under this Contract, no contractor, subcontractor, or any person acting on a contractor’s or subcontractor’s behalf shall discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, sex, age, disability, ancestry, color, national origin, military status or any other class protected by law. The aforesaid provision shall include but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment, or recruitment advertising, layoff or selection for training including apprenticeship. The Contractor shall post notices in conspicuous places setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause for the benefit of employees or applicants for employment. 37.0 Contract Work Performed by the Owner 37.1 In the event that it becomes necessary for the Owner to perform work on an immediate nature (such as the placement of barricades or replacement of signs or other protective devices) required of the Contractor by this Contract because of a failure or refusal of the contractor to perform such work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the actual cost of the labor, materials and equipment necessary to perform such work plus a reasonable overhead amount. The Owner shall be required to notify or attempt to notify the designated representative of the Contractor of the necessity to perform such work. If the Contractor refuses or fails within a reasonable time to perform or cause the performance of such work, the Owner shall perform it and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for same. 38.0 Certified Payroll 38.1 The Contractor shall post in a prominent and accessible place on the site of the work a legible statement of the schedule of wage rates specified in the Bid Documents to the various classifications of laborers, workers, and mechanics employed. This statement shall remain posted during the life of the Contract. 38.2 The Contractor shall, as soon as performance under the contract begins, supply to the prevailing wage coordinator of the Owner a schedule of the dates during the life of the Contract on which wages will be paid to employees. The Contractor shall also deliver to the prevailing wage coordinator a certified copy of their payroll, within two weeks after the initial pay date, and supplemental reports for each month thereafter. If the life of the Contract is expected to be no more than four (4) months from the beginning of performance by the Contractor, such


58

supplemental reports shall be filed each week after the initial report. The certification of each payroll shall be executed by the Contractor or duly-appointed agent thereof and shall recite that the payroll is correct and complete and that the wage rates shown are not less than those required by Chapter 4115 of the Ohio Revised Code. The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of payroll copies from all Subcontractors. 38.3 The Contractor shall make employment records available for inspection by authorized representatives of the Owner and will permit employees to be interviewed during work hours by these representatives. 38.4 All monthly payrolls shall contain or have attached the following:

(a) The name, employer identification number, and social security number of each employee.

(b) The current address of the employee.

(c) The Job Classification of the employee (same as shown on wage determination or provisional approval).

(d) The rate of pay. (e) The hours worked each day and total for each week. (f) The fringe payments and deductions made. 38.5 The failure by the Contractor to furnish and submit the above information as part of the required monthly Certified Payroll will be cause for the Owner to withhold the preparation of the monthly estimate. In the event of a violation of the wage rate provisions by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, the Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, suspend further payments or proceed to terminate the Contract as provided by other sections of the Contract. 38.6 The Contractor shall file with the Owner upon completion of the project and prior to final payment therefore an Affidavit of Final Payment stating that they have fully complied with Sections 4115.03 to 4115.16 of the Ohio Revised Code. The Contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining such Affidavits from all Subcontractors and for forwarding the Affidavits to the Owner. 38.7 This provision shall not apply to public improvements where the federal government or any of its agencies furnishes by loan or grant all or any part of the funds used in constructing such improvements, provided the federal government or any of its agencies prescribes predetermined minimum wages to be paid to mechanics and laborers employed in the construction of such improvements. 38.8 The Department of Industrial Relations shall file with the Secretary of State a list of contractors and subcontractors whom it finds have been prosecuted and convicted for violations of Sections 4115.03 to 4115.16 of the Ohio Revised Code, and each such contractor or subcontractor is prohibited from contracting directly or indirectly with any public authority for the construction of a public improvement or from performing any work on the same as a contractor or subcontractor for period of two years from the date of conviction. The Owner shall not award a contract for a public improvement to any contractor or subcontractor during the time that its


59

name appears on such list. The filing of the notice of conviction with the Secretary of State shall constitute notice to all public authorities. 39.0 Utilities 39.1 – The Contractor shall have located in the field all existing utilities by contacting the Ohio Utility Protection Service (OUPS) at least 48 hours at (800) 362-2764 before the start of any excavation. 39.2 The Contractor shall notify all utility companies, all pipe line owners, or other parties affected by the project, and have all necessary adjustments of the public or private utility fixtures, pipe lines, and other appurtenances within or adjacent to the limits of construction made as soon as practicable. 39.3 Water lines, gas lines, wire lines, service connections, water and gas meter boxes, water and gas valve boxes, light standards, cableways, signals, and all other utility appurtenances within the limits of the proposed construction which are to be relocated or adjusted are to be moved by the utility company or its authorized designee, except as otherwise provided for in the special provisions or as noted on the plans. 39.4 It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has fully considered in their bid the financial impact or otherwise of all known permanent and temporary utility appurtenances in their present or relocated positions and that no additional compensation will be allowed to the Contractor for any delays, inconvenience or damage sustained due to any interference from known utility appurtenances or the operation of moving said utility appurtenances.


60

ADDITIONAL CONTRACT FORMS

NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT

AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT

WAIVERS OF MECHANICS’ LIENS

PAYROLL INFORMATION

AND

FINAL PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT


61

NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PUBLIC IMPROVEMENT Section 1311.252 Ohio Revised Code

State of Ohio, County of Montgomery, SS. Notice is hereby given by the undersigned public authority (“Public Authority”) of the commencement of a public improvement (“Project”) as follows: (1) The Project is identified as:

Project Name: WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES

Location: 2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd Dayton OH 45417-9544.

Bid No.: 20-003 (2) The Public Authority responsible for the Project is: Five Rivers MetroParks 409 E. Monument Avenue, Third Floor

Dayton, Ohio, 45402-1374

(3) All principal contractors on the Project and the trade of each are as follows:

Principal Contractors Trade

(4) The names and addresses of the sureties for all principal contractors

are as follows:

Principal Contractors Surety


62

(5) The name and address of the representative of the Public Authority upon whom service may be made for the purposes of serving an affidavit pursuant to Section 1311.26 of the Ohio Revised Code is: Name: Rebecca A. Benná Title: Executive Director Address: 409 E. Monument Ave. 3rd Floor

Dayton, Ohio 45402-1374 Public Authority BY: Title: Joseph R. Zimmerman, Project Manager The signator of this Notice of Commencement of Public Improvement (“Notice”) personally appeared before me on behalf of the Public Authority, a notary public in and for said county, and swore that all the information in the Notice is true as he/she verily believes and further that he/she is fully authorized by the Public Authority to give said notice. Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , 20 . Notary Public


63

AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT , being first duly sworn, says that he is

the of having a Contract with

Five Rivers MetroParks for

situated on or in front of the following described property in Montgomery County,

Ohio, viz: whereof Five Rivers MetroParks,

Montgomery County, Ohio, was the owner, part owner, or lessee.

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * *

Sub-Contractors

Affiant further says that the following shows the names of every sub-contractor in the

employ of said giving the amount, if

any, which is due, or to become due, to them or any of them, for work done, or material,

or machinery, or fuel furnished to date hereof under said Contract.

NOTE: This statement must be accompanied by a similar sworn statement by each of the

Sub-Contractors.

Name Address Trade Amount*

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

*Amount: Amount due or to be come due for work and/or materials to date thereof.

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * *


64

Material Supplies

Affiant further says that the following shows the names of every person furnishing

machinery, material, or fuel to giving the

amount, if any, which is due, or to become due, to the, or any of the, for machinery,

material, or fuel furnished to date hereof, under said Contract.


NOTE: The above must be accompanied by a “Certificate of Supply”. In Lieu of such

certificate, there may be furnished a written waiver of lien, a written release, or receipt.

*Amount: Amount due or to become due for work and/or materials to date hereof.

* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *

* * * * * *

Labor

Affiant further says that the following shows the names of every laborer unpaid in the

employee of furnishing labor under said Contract,

giving the amount, if any, which is due, or to become due, for labor done to date hereof.


NOTE: If the fact that every laborer has been paid in full, then recite: “Every Laborer has

been paid in full.” If not, then give each unpaid laborer’s name and amount due or to

become due.

*Amount: Amount due or to become due for work and/or materials to date thereof.


65

Affiant further states that there is due or to become due to

for work performed, or machinery, material, or fuel

furnished to to date hereof under said Contracts,

the sum of $ . That the amounts due or to become due to

said sub-contractors materialmen, and laborers for work done or machinery, material, or

fuel furnished to the date hereof, to are fully and correctly set

forth opposite their names, respectively, in the aforesaid statements, and further

evidenced by certificates of every person furnishing material, machinery, or fuel, hereto

attached, and made a part hereof.

Affiant further state that has not employed or

purchased or procured machinery, material, or fuel furnished, under said Contracts, other

than above set forth.

Signature

Name

Title

Sworn to before me and subscribed in my presence at , Ohio, this

day of , 20 .

, ,

Notary Public County State


66

CONDITIONAL PARTIAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN Progress Payment No. (2)

TO ALLWHOM IT MAY CONCERN: Upon receipt of the sum of (3) Dollars ($ ),

the undersigned, subject to the reservations contained herein below, does hereby waive,

release and relinquish any and all liens and claims for liens for labor or work performed

and/or material furnished through the (4) day of (5) , 20(6) to

the construction project at commonly known as (7) WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE

CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES, , located at (8) 2222 N. James H.

McGee Blvd, Dayton OH 45417-9544., and owned by (9) Five Rivers MetroParks.

Nothing in this Partial Waiver of Mechanics’ Lien shall waive or otherwise affect lien

rights for retainage now being held by (10)

for labor or work performed and/or material furnished prior to the (4) day of

(5) , 20(6) .

Additionally, nothing in this Partial Waiver of Mechanics’ Lien shall in any way affect

the priority of any lien filed after the date hereof. Further, the undersigned specifically

reserves all lien rights for labor or work performed and/or material furnished after the (4)

day of (5) , 20(6) on or to the above referenced project.

THE INDIVIDUAL SIGNING THIS PARTIAL LIEN WAIVER ON BEHALF OF THE UNDERSIGNED, WARRANTS THAT HE/SHE HAS FULL AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE THIS LIEN WAIVER. Dated this (11) day of (12) , 20(13) .

WITNESSES:

(14) (15)

(14) BY:(16)

STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF MONTGOMERY, ss:

Subscribed and acknowledged in my presence at (17) , Ohio,

as being the free and voluntary act and deed of (15) for the use and

purposes therein mentioned on the (11) day of (12) , 20(13) .

Notary Public (1) Underlined material may require editing


67

(2) Number of Progress Payment

(3) Amount of Progress Payment

(4) Day – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(5) Month – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(6) Year – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(7) Name of Project

(8) Address of Project

(9) Name of Owner

(10) Name of Original Contractor

(11) Day

(12) Month

(13) Year

(14) Signature of Witnesses

(15) Name of Party Waiving Lien

(16) Name and Capacity of Signing Agent

(17) Location of Acknowledgement


69

UNCONDITIONAL PARTIAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN Progress Payment No. (2)

TO ALLWHOM IT MAY CONCERN: The undersigned, in consideration of the sum of (3) Dollars ($

), the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, subject to the reservations contained

herein below, does hereby waive, release and relinquish any and all liens and claims for liens for

labor or work performed and/or material furnished through the (4) day of (5)

, 20(6) to the construction project at commonly known as (7) WESLEYAN

METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES,, located at (8)

Wesleyan MetroPark, and owned by (9) Five Rivers MetroParks.

Nothing in this Partial Waiver of Mechanics’ Lien shall waive or otherwise affect lien rights

for retainage now being held by (10) for

labor or work performed and/or material furnished prior to the (4) day of (5) , 20(6)

.

Additionally, nothing in this Partial Waiver of Mechanics’ Lien shall in any way affect the

priority of any lien filed after the date hereof. Further, the undersigned specifically reserves all lien

rights for labor or work performed and/or material furnished after the (4) day of (5)

, 20(6) on or to the above referenced project.

THE INDIVIDUAL SIGNING THIS PARTIAL LIEN WAIVER ON BEHALF OF THE UNDERSIGNED, WARRANTS THAT HE/SHE HAS FULL AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE THIS LIEN WAIVER. Dated this (11) day of (12) , 20(13) .

WITNESSES:

(14) (15)

(14) BY:(16)


Subscribed and acknowledged in my presence at (17) , Ohio, as

being the free and voluntary act and deed of (15) for the use and purposes

therein mentioned on the (11) day of (12) , 20(13) .

Notary Public


70

(1) Underlined material may require editing

(2) Number of Progress Payment

(3) Amount of Progress Payment

(4) Day – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(5) Month – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(6) Year – Effective Date of Progress Payment

(7) Name of Project


(9) Name of Owner

(10) Name of Original Contractor

(11) Day

(12) Month

(13) Year






71

CONDITIONAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN TO ALLWHOM IT MAY CONCERN: Upon receipt of the sum of (2) Dollars ($ ),

the undersigned, does hereby waive, release and relinquish any and all liens and claims

for liens for labor or work performed and/or material furnished to the construction project

commonly known as (3)WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN

MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES, located at (4)2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd, Dayton OH

45417-9544., and owned by (5)Five Rivers MetroParks.

Additionally, the undersigned agrees to serve a new Notice of Furnishing if the

undersigned furnishes additional material or performs additional labor or work on or to the

aforementioned project, after the date hereof, and for which the undersigned wishes to

reserve lien rights against said project.

THE INDIVIDUAL SIGNING THIS LIEN WAIVER ON BEHALF OF THE UNDERSIGNED, WARRANTS THAT HE/SHE HAS FULL AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE THIS LIEN WAIVER. Dated this (6) day of (7) , 20(8) .

WITNESSES:

(9) (10)

(9) BY:(11)




purposes therein mentioned on the (6) day of (7) , 20 (8).

Notary Public


72


(2) Amount of Payment

(3) Name of Project


(5) Name of Owner

(6) Day

(7) Month

(8) Year






73

UNCONDITIONAL WAIVER OF MECHANICS’ LIEN TO ALLWHOM IT MAY CONCERN: The undersigned, in consideration of the sum of (2)

Dollars ($ ), the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged does hereby

waive, release and relinquish any and all liens and claims for liens for labor or work

performed and/or material furnished to the construction project commonly known as

(3)WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES,

located at (4) 2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd, Dayton OH 45417-9544., and owned by

(5)Five Rivers MetroParks.

Additionally, the undersigned agrees to serve a new Notice of Furnishing if the

undersigned furnishes additional material or performs additional labor or work on or to the

aforementioned project, after the date hereof, and for which the undersigned wishes to

reserve lien rights against said project.

THE INDIVIDUAL SIGNING THIS LIEN WAIVER ON BEHALF OF THE UNDERSIGNED, WARRANTS THAT HE/SHE HAS FULL AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE THIS LIEN WAIVER. Dated this (6) day of (7) , 20(8) .

WITNESSES:

(9) (10)

(9) BY:(11)




purposes therein mentioned on the (6) day of (7) , 20(8) .

Notary Public


74


(2) Amount of Payment

(3) Name of Project


(5) Name of Owner

(6) Day

(7) Month

(8) Year






75


PAYROLL INFORMATION

DATE:

I, , , do herby certify: Name of Signatory Party Title 1. That I pay or supervise the payment of the persons employed by Contractor on the WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES,. or Subcontractor Building or Work 2. That during the payroll period commencing on the day of , 20 , and ending on the day of , 20 , all person employed on said project have been paid the full weekly wages earned; that no rebates have been or will be made either directly or indirectly to or on behalf of said

Contractor or Subcontractor from the full weekly wages earned by such persons; and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the wages earned by such persons, other than permissible deductions which are described below: 3. That any payrolls otherwise under this Contract required for the above period are correct and complete; that the wage rates for laborers or mechanics contained therein are not less than the applicable wage rates contained in the specifications as supplied by the Department of Industrial Relations or any wage determination incorporated into the Contract and that the classifications set forth therein for each laborer or mechanic conform with the work he performed. 4. That any apprentices employed in the above period are duly registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the Ohio Apprenticeship Council. 5. That: (a) Where fringe benefits are paid to approved plans, funds, or programs, in addition to the basic hourly wage rates paid to each laborer or mechanic listed in the above referenced payroll, payments of fringe benefits listed in the Contract have been or will be made to appropriate programs for the benefit of such employees, except as noted in Section 4(c) below; and


76

(b) Where fringe benefits are paid in cash, each laborer or mechanic listed in the above referenced payroll has been paid as indicated on the payroll, an amount not less than the sum of the applicable basic hourly wage rate plus the amount of the required fringe benefits as listed in the Contract, except as noted in Section 4(c) below: (c) Exceptions: Exception (Craft) Explanation Remarks: Name and Title , Signature The willful falsification of any of the above statements may subject the Contractor or Subcontractor to fines as described in Section 4115.99 of the Ohio Revised Code.


77

FINAL PAYROLL AFFIDAVIT (Contractor or Subcontractor)

I, , of the Name of person signing affidavit title of the , do

hereby certify that the wages paid to all employees for the full number of hours worked in

connection with the Contract to the Improvement, Repair and Construction of:

WESLEYAN METROPARK ADVENTURE CENTRAL KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS AND UPGRADES,

2222 N. James H. McGee Blvd, Dayton OH 45417-9544..

Project and Location

During the following period from to

is in accordance with the prevailing wages prescribed by

the Contract Document. I further certify that no rebates or deductions for any wages

due any person have been directly or indirectly made other than those provided by law.

Signature of Officer or Agent Sworn to and subscribed in my presence this day of , 20 . Notary Public The above affidavit must be executed and sworn to by the officer or agent or the Contractor or Subcontractor who supervises the payment of employees, before the Owner will release the surety and/or make final payment due under the terms of the Contract.


78

SPECIAL CONDITIONS of the CONTRACT

1. The kitchen will be in use through July 23, 2020. Work in the kitchen proper may not start until July 24, 2020.

2. The work shall be substantially complete by September 2, 2020, however the Contractor shall ensure that the work is finished so that all final inspections by the Building Department and Health Department (or others, as required) are passed and Certificates of Occupancy are issued on or before September 4, 2020.

3. The kitchen shall be ready and available for full use at the latest on September 8, 2020.

4. The Contractor may perform mobilization, staging, and preliminary work in areas outside the kitchen before July 24, 2020 with prior approval by the Owner. The facility will remain occupied and in operation during this period, so access may be limited, and at the sole discretion of the Owner. The Contractor shall submit a schedule for approval in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall cooperate to the maximum extent possible to provide access to the work area in a manner that limits impact on the facility’s operations and does not create a hazard to the occupants.


79

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

ADMINISTRATIVE PROVISIONS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS REQUIRED A. Base Bid: As described on the Bid Breakdown Form

B. Bid Alternates: As described on the Bid Breakdown Form

1.02 CONTRACT METHOD

A. Perform the Work at the lump sum awarded, and at Unit Prices, if any, as defined by the Bid Breakdown Form.

1.03 WORK SEQUENCE AND TIME

A. Start work within 10 calendar days after receipt of “Notice to Proceed” or fully executed contract (as appropriate). Complete Work within the Contract Time, as established by the Contract.

B. Perform Work in stages to accommodate park security and occupancy requirements; coordinate schedule and operations with Five Rivers MetroParks:

Joseph R. Zimmerman

Five Rivers MetroParks 409 E. Monument Ave. 3rd Floor Dayton, OH 45402-1374 937-277-4825 C. At least seven calendar days prior to the date of the Pre-Construction Meeting,

submit the following documents to the Architect/Engineer: 1. Proposed Progress Schedule 2. Preliminary Schedule of Shop Drawing Submissions. 3. Preliminary Schedule of Values of the Work. 4. Bond and certificates of insurance as required by the General Conditions. D. Limit access to site from roads as directed by the Owner’s Representative

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Owner: Whenever the term “Owner” is used in the Contract Documents it shall refer to Five Rivers MetroParks or its authorized representative.

B. Project Site: The Work described herein and shown on the drawings is located in Dayton, Montgomery County, Ohio.

C. Architect/Engineer: The Architect/Engineer is a duly authorized representative of the Owner as identified by the Owner.


80

1.05 MANAGEMENT OF CONTRACTOR’S FORCES A. Designate a superintendent who shall represent the Contractor on the job site.

Directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

B. Assign appropriate resources, schedule and supervise the Work to meet the construction schedule.

C. Direction from the Owner to the Contractor will only be through the designated Owner’s Representative. Contractor shall not accept direction from nor negotiate changes with any person not identified as the Owner’s Representative or designee, including other employees of the Owner.

1.06 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. After award and receipt of Contract Notice to Proceed (as appropriate) contact the MetroParks’ Owner’s Representative to schedule a pre-construction meeting.

B. Present at the conference will be the Contractor, the Superintendent, the Architect/Engineer, the Owner’s Representative, and other MetroParks personnel as designated by the Owner’s Representative.

C. The Owner’s Representative will schedule meetings during the Project as needed to review progress of the work.

1.07 SECURITY

A. Prior to beginning Work, consult with the Owner’s Representative to learn the rules and regulations for security and use of the site.

B. Instruct Subcontractors on these regulations prior to beginning their respective portions of the Work.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of construction elements, with provisions to accommodate items to be installed later.

1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Procedures:

1. Submit the number of copies which Contractor requires to be returned, plus three (3) copies to be retained by Architect/Engineer.

2. Deliver submittals to Architect/Engineer at an address to be provided at the Pre-Construction Meeting.

3. Identify submittals by Project Name, Contractor, Subcontractor, major supplier and pertinent Drawing sheet and detail numbers, and Specification Section number, as appropriate. Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.

4. Identify deviations from Contract Documents. 5. After Architect/Engineer review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required,

identifying changes made since previous submittal. 6. Obtain Architect/Engineer’s approval of required Shop Drawings and

Product Data before fabrication (or installation, as appropriate). 7. Distribute copies of approved submittals to concerned persons. Instruct

recipients to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions.


81

8. Fabricate and install from approved submittals. B. Schedules:

1. Submit initial Progress Schedule and Preliminary Schedule of Values in duplicate within fifteen (15) days after date of Notice of Award. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, reflecting changes since previous submittal.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values in compliance with Article 14.1 of the General Conditions.

C. Shop Drawings: Contractor’s approval stamp, initialed or signed, shall certify field measurements have been verified and shop drawing complies with Contract Documents.

D. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data; supplement manufacturer’s standard data to provide information unique to the Work.

1.10 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS AND CERTIFICATES A. Instructions:

1. Comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence. Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.

2. When required in individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for product data.

B. Certificates: When required by individual Specification Sections, submit manufacturer’s certificate, in duplicate, that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.11 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in respective Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide qualified personnel to observe field conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of installation, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and to make appropriate recommendations.

B. Require representative to make written report to Architect/Engineer of observations and recommendations.

1.12 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. General: Location of construction facilities, including construction office and storage yard on site, shall be subject to approval by Architect/Engineer; remove upon completion of work prior to Substantial Completion inspection.

B. Service: Arrange for water, electrical energy, compressed air and other services to meet own requirement. No extra allowance will be made to Contractor on account of said connections. Where available, FRMP will provide required utilities at no charge to the Contractor, however, all costs to connect and disconnect will be the Contractor’s responsibility.

C. Sanitary: Provide suitable sanitary facilities for construction personnel. Facilities shall comply at all times with local, County and State Government Health Departments.

D. Barriers:


82

1. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas, to provide for use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction or cleaning operations.

2. Location and arrangement: Conform to ordinances and laws. E. Sign: Provide and erect a 42”x6” temporary job sign at the site. Content and

artwork to be provided by Owner. Do not erect any additional signs on the job site without the Owner’s approval. Remove temporary job sign during final cleaning.

F. Cleaning during construction: 1. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish, dispose of off-site daily. 2. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary

facilities. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original condition.

1.13 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Purchase materials and equipment in time to complete the Contractor’s Work as required in this Agreement.

B. Take prompt and decisive action in expediting deliveries. C. Keep Owner and Architect/Engineer advised of delivery dates and any changes

which may affect progress of the Work. D. Determine that materials and equipment received are correct, suitable, and in

accordance with Specifications. E. Store equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and

labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Furnish equipment personnel to handle products by methods that will prevent soiling or damage.

1.14 HISTORICAL OR ARCHAEOLOGICAL DISCOVERY

A. If during the course of construction, evidence of deposits of historical or archaeological interest is found, cease operations affecting the find and notify the Owner, who shall notify the State Historical Department. No further disturbance of the deposits shall ensue until the Contractor has been notified by the Owner that he may proceed. The Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed only after the State official has surveyed the find and made a determination of value and effect and submitted such determination to the Owner.

B. Compensation to the Contractor, if any, for loss of time or changes in construction to avoid the find, shall be determined in accordance with changed conditions or change order provisions of the Specifications.

1.15 ARCHITECT/ENGINEERING SERVICES

A. Owner will furnish horizontal and vertical control points as listed in plans. Contractor shall develop and make detail surveys as required to execute the construction.

B. Preserve all monuments, benchmarks, reference points and stakes established by the Architect/Engineer. In case of willful or careless destruction of same, the Contractor will be charged with the resulting expense of replacement and shall be responsible for any mistakes or loss of time that may result from their unnecessary loss or disturbance.


83

C. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to call to the attention of the Architect/Engineer any reference lines, points or benchmarks which may have been disturbed or which seem to be off line or grade.

D. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for extra administration and inspection costs necessitated by continuance of work beyond the completion date recognizing time extensions granted by Owner. This cost will be a part of the assessed liquidated damages, herein specified.

E. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for extra administration and inspection costs necessitated by use of equipment other than that detailed in the plans and specifications.

1.16 LIQUIDATION OF DAMAGES

- Reference Section 19 of the General Conditions. 1.17 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS

A. A complete set of Plans and Specifications shall be retained on the job by the Contractor at all times, when they are on the job, for use of those legitimately interested.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 QUALITY A. Provide new materials and equipment for Work unless otherwise specified. B. “Provide” in these Specifications means “furnish and install”.

C. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

D. The date of the standard is that which is in effect as of the Bid date except when a specific date is specified.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform Work by person qualified to produce installation of specified quality. B. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to

withstand stresses, vibrations, and racking. 3.02 PAYMENT

- See Section 26 in General Conditions. 3.03 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the contract for issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion.

B. In addition to submittals required by the conditions of the Contract, provide submittals required by governing authorities, and submit a final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.


84

3.04 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Provide duplicate copies of Contractor’s Subcontractor’s Supplier’s and

Manufacturer’s warranties and bonds. B. Submit prior to final application for payment. For items of Work delayed materially

beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Architect/Engineer shall schedule and administer project meetings.

B. Architect/Engineer will attend meetings to ascertain that work is expedited consistent with construction schedule and with Contract Documents.

1.02 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule within 5 days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance: 1. Owner. 2. Architect/Engineer and their inspector/representative. 3. Prime contractors. 4. Major subcontractors of all prime contractors. 5. Safety representative. 6. Representatives of governmental or other regulatory agencies. C. Minimum agenda:

1. Distribute and discuss list of major subcontractors, tentative time and payment schedule and construction schedule approved by Architect/Engineer prior to construction.

2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Relation and coordination of prime contractors. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Processing of field decisions and cChange Orders. 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Submittal of shop drawings, project data and samples. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 9. Use of premises for office and storage areas and Owner’s requirements. 10. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 11. Safety and first-aid procedures. 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures.

1.03 PROGRESS MEETING


85

A. Schedule regular meetings at least once a month or as determined at Pre-Construction Conference.

B. Set location of meetings as determined at Pre-Construction Conference. C. Attendance: 1. Architect/Engineer and their inspector/representative. 2. Prime contractor. 3. Subcontractors as pertinent to agenda. 4. Safety representative. 5. Representatives of governmental or other regulatory agencies. D. Minimum agenda: 1. Review work progress since last meeting. 2. Note field observations, problems and decisions. 3. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 4. Review off-site fabrication problems.

5. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule. 6. Revise construction schedule as indicated. 7. Plan progress during next work period. 8. Coordinate projected progress with other prime contractors.

9. Review submittal schedules and expedite as required to maintain schedule. 10. Review changes proposed by Owner for effect on construction schedule and

effect on completion date. 11. Safety procedures review.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL A. Submit Shop Drawings, project data and samples required by Specification Sections. B. Designate in construction schedule proposed submittal dates. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Drawings prepared by Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier or distributor which illustrate some portion of the Work.

B. Show fabrication, layout, setting or erection details.


86

C. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail numbers shown on contract drawings.

D. Minimum sheet size: 8-1/2” x 11”. 1.03 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer’s standard schematic drawings: 1. Modify Drawings to delete information which is not applicable to project.

2. Supplement standard information to provide additional information applicable to project.

B. Manufacturer’s catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive data. 1. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials, products or models.

2. Show dimensions and clearances required. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show wiring diagrams and controls.

1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Schedule submissions to be received by Architect/Engineer at least fifteen (15) calendar days before reviewed submittals will be needed by the Contractor to order subject materials or equipment. Submittals shall be reviewed and returned to contractor within the fifteen-calendar period.

B. Submit number of copies of Shop Drawings, project data and samples which Contractor requires for distribution plus three (3) copies which will be retained by Architect/Engineer.

C. Accompany submittals with transmittal letter containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor’s name and address. 4. The number of each Shop Drawing, product data and sample submitted. 5. Notification of deviations from Contract Documents. 6. Other pertinent data. D. Submittals shall include: 1. Date and revision dates. 2. Project title and number.

3. The names of Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractor, Supplier, manufacturer, and separate detailer when pertinent.

4. Identification of product or material. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field dimensions clearly identified as such. 7. Specification Section number. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM number or Federal Specification. 9. A blank space 4” x 5” for the Architect/Engineer’s approval stamp. 10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.

1.05 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings:

1. Revise initial Drawings as required and resubmit as specified for initial submittal.


87

2. Indicate on Drawings any changes which have been made other than those requested by Architect/Engineer.

B. Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required for initial submittal.

1.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTALS AFTER REVIEW

A. Distribute copies of Shop Drawings and product data which carry Architect/Engineer’s approval stamp as needed.

B. Distribute samples as directed by the Architect/Engineer. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Approval required:

1. The Contract is based on the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents.

2. All products proposed for use, including those specified by required attributes and performance, shall require approval by the Architect/Engineer before being incorporated into the Work.

3. Do not substitute materials, equipment, or methods unless such substitution has been specifically approved for this Work by the Architect/Engineer.

B. “Or Equal”: 1. Where the phrase “or equal” or “or equal as approved by

Architect/Engineer” occurs in the Contract Documents, means any material which, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, is equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, design and performance to the material specified, and will function adequately in accordance with the general design.

2. Where in these Specifications, one or more certain materials, trade names, or articles of certain manufacture are mentioned, it is done for the express purpose of establishing a basis durability, efficiency, quality, performance, function and meeting the design intent and not the purpose of limiting competition.

3. The Architect/Engineer shall evaluate proposed substitutions and the decision of the Architect/Engineer shall be final.

1.08 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer, prior to the completion of the work under this Contract, four (4) copies of all manufacturer’s drawings, parts catalogs, wiring diagrams, installation and operating instructions, guarantees and other data or information which may be needed or useful in the operation, maintenance, repair, for ordering replacements, for all items of mechanical equipment furnished under this contract. Such data shall be complete in every detail, including index, and each set shall be assembled under a suitable cover. The above noted requirements shall be furnished in addition to any specified wall-mounted instructions required under the Technical Provisions of the Specifications. The cost of furnishing the above data shall be included in the applicable contract unit price for the equipment furnished.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


88

2.01 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL APPROVAL A. A specification followed by one or more manufacturer’s and “or equal” is open to

all equal products or materials. 2.02 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Review of Shop Drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for correct ordering of materials and equipment. Contractor review shall insure that equipment will fit in available space.

B. Information to be included in the submittal: 1. Manufacturer’s model number of catalog number, size and data. Indicate

operating data for each piece of equipment. 2. Indication of all performance data, construction materials, finishes and

modifications to manufacturer’s standard design called for in the specifications.

3. Location of connections for all piping required. 4. Roughing-in, foundation and support point dimensions. 5. Data shall be coordinated and included in single submittal. 6. For submissions, such as catalogs, mark information that is to be provided,

including all accessories and modifications, so there is no confusion. C. Submit Shop Drawings in brochure form and include all related equipment in one

brochure. D. Submit Shop Drawings of all equipment in this specification and as specifically

stated in the individual sections. E. Contractor is to affix their company name, in the form of a stamp, to all Shop

Drawings and Submittals before submitting. Contractor shall stamp or mark Shop Drawings for submittals “Approved”, date and initial (or sign) prior to issuing.

2.03 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. During construction, maintain complete and legible set of drawings, showing changes and deviations between actual construction and Architect/Engineer’s drawings as outlined in Section 01720, Project Record Drawings.

2.04 INSPECTION

A. Provide in triplicate, a Certificate of Inspection at completion of the work. Inspection to be performed by local authority having jurisdiction (i.e., City Inspector, County Inspector, etc.).

2.05 REPORTS A. Submit for attachment to Substantial Completion Certificate the following:

1. Letter certifying that all mechanical installations comply with applicable codes.

2. All other test reports. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.

END OF SECTION


89

SECTION 01370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Submit to the Architect/Engineer a preliminary Schedule of Values at the Pre-Construction Meeting.

B. Upon request by Architect/Engineer, support values given with data that will substantiate their correctness.

1.02 SCHEDULE USE

A. Use schedule of values only as basis for Contractor’s requests for payments on Lump Sum items as requested in Section 01900, Measurement & Payment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM OF SCHEDULE

A. Submit typewritten or computer-generated Schedule of Values on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper.

B. Use Bid Breakdown Form (if included) as the basis for format. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARING SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Itemize separate line item costs for each of the following general cost items: 1. Insurance and Performance and Payment Bonds. 2. Field supervision and layout. 3. Temporary facilities and controls. 4. Mobilization and demobilization. 3.02 REVIEW AND RESUBMITTAL A. After review by Architect/Engineer, revise and resubmit schedule as required. B. Resubmit revised schedule in same manner as initial submission.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contractor shall provide all necessary equipment, labor and materials for temporary construction facilities and controls as follows:

1. Barriers.


90

2. Protection of installed work. 3. Security and safety 4. Storage of materials. 5. Utility Services. 6. Sanitary facilities. 7. Removal.

1.02 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS

A. Erect and maintain barricades and lights or guards for protection and warning of pedestrians and vehicles; prevent access of unauthorized persons to portions of site where work is in progress.

B. Location and Arrangement: Conform to ordinances and laws. Traffic control during construction shall be according to the Ohio Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and shall meet with the approval of Architect/Engineer and Ownerand any affected government entity.

1.03 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Provide temporary protection for installed products. Control traffic in immediate area to minimize the possibility of damage.

1.04 SECURITY

A. Protect the work, existing facilities and newly installed items from unauthorized use, vandalism and theft.

1.05 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A. Arrange for storage space to suit needs. B. Provide suitable protection from weather and vandalism for all materials and

equipment to be installed. Storage shall be dry, clean and safe. Any materials or equipment damaged, deteriorated, rusted, or defaced due to improper storage shall be fully repaired, refinished or replaced, as directed by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Store materials and equipment in manner which will preserve the quality and fitness; provide temporary storage buildings as required.

D. Location of construction facilities and yard on site, shall be subject to approval by Architect/Engineer; remove upon completion of work.

1.06 UTILITY SERVICES A. Provide and pay for all temporary utility services, connections, meters, water,

electrical energy, compressed air and other services to meet own requirements until substantial completion of project.

1.07 SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide suitable non-segregated sanitary facilities for construction personnel.

Maintain in sanitary condition. 1.08 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services and construction prior to

Substantial Completion inspection.


91

B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified, or to original, condition.


END OF SECTION

SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Contractor:

1. Submit written certification to Architect/Engineer that project, or designated portion of project is substantially complete.

2. Submit list of major items to be completed or corrected. B. Architect/Engineer will make an inspection within fourteen days after receipt of

certification together with Owner’s Representative. C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is substantially complete: 1. Architect/Engineer shall prepare an amended list of items to be completed

or corrected as determined by the inspection. 2. Architect/Engineer will prepare and issue a Certificate of Substantial

Completion containing the date of substantial completion, an amended list of items to be completed or corrected, a time schedule to complete or correct work, time and date Owner will assume possession of work or designated portion thereof, and signatures of the Architect/Engineer, Contractor and Owner.

D. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is not substantially complete: 1. Architect/Engineer shall notify Contractor in writing stating reasons. 2. Contractor shall complete work and send second written notice to

Architect/Engineer certifying that project, or designated portion of project is substantially complete.

3. Architect/Engineer will reinspect work. 1.02 FINAL INSPECTION A. Contractor shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents.


92

4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of Owner’s Representative and are operational.

5. Project is completed and ready for final inspection. B. Architect/Engineer will make final inspection within fourteen days after receipt of

certification. C. Should Architect/Engineer consider that work is not finally complete: 1. Architect/Engineer shall notify Contractor in writing stating reasons.

2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send second written notice to Architect/Engineer certifying the work is complete.

3. Architect/Engineer will reinspect work. 1.03 REINSPECTION COST

A. Should Architect/Engineer be required to perform second inspection because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Owner will compensate Architect/Engineer for additional services and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project record documents: As required by Section 01720. B. Guarantees and Bond specified in General Conditions. 1.05 INSTRUCTION

A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation of all systems, mechanical, electrical or other equipment as needed.

1.06 EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS A. Submit the following documents before final payment is made: 1. Contractor’s Release or Waiver of Liens.

2. Separate releases or waivers of liens for subcontractors, suppliers and others with lien rights against property of Owner together with list of those parties.

B. All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Architect/Engineer. 1.07 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Contractor shall submit final application in accordance with requirements of General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Architect/Engineer will issue final certificate in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.

1.08 POST-CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION

A. Prior to expiration of one year from date of substantial completion, Architect/Engineer will make visual inspection of project in company with Owner and Contractor to determine whether correction of work is required in accordance with provisions of General Conditions.

B. For guarantees beyond one year, Architect/Engineer will make inspection at request of Owner after notification to Contractor.

C. Architect/Engineer will promptly notify Contractor in writing of any observed deficiencies.


93


END OF SECTION

SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contractor shall provide all work necessary to finally clean and maintain throughout the construction period, structures, paving and all sites of work in a standard cleanliness as described in this Section.

1.02 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE

A. Comply with requirements for cleaning as described in various other Sections within this specification.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Inspection: Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Provide personnel, equipment and materials needed to maintain specified standards of cleanliness.

2.02 COMPATIBILITY

A. Use cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with surface being cleaned.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General:

1. Retain stored items in orderly arrangement allowing maximum access. Do not impede drainage or traffic. Provide required protection of materials.

2. Remove scrap, debris, and waste material promptly from job site. 3. Store items awaiting removal in good order. Observe fire protection

requirements. Control dust and fugitive air emissions. No burning will be permitted.


94

B. Site:

1. Inspect site and pickup scrap, debris, and waste material daily. Remove items to place designated for storage.

2. Inspect arrangement of materials stored on site; restack, tidy or otherwise service storage arrangements.

3. Maintain site in neat and orderly condition at all times. 3.02 FINAL CLEANING

A. Definition: “Clean” shall be level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality maintenance equipment materials.

B. General: Prior to completion of Work, remove from job site all tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning.

C. Site: Broom clean paved areas on site and public paved areas adjacent to site. Remove resultant debris.

3.03 CLEANING DURING OWNER’S OCCUPANCY

A. Should Owner occupy Work or any portion thereof prior to its completion and acceptance, responsibilities for interim for interim and final cleaning of occupied spaces shall be as determined by Architect/Engineer in accordance with Contract General Conditions.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS A. Maintain at job site one (1) copy of: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Reviewed shop drawings. 5. Change Orders. 6. Other modifications to Contract. 7. Field test records. 8. Job Photographs.

B. Store documents in temporary field facilities apart from documents used for construction.

C. Maintain documents in clean, dry and legible conditions. D. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. E. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Architect/Engineer and

Owner. 1.02 RECORDING A. Label “PROJECT RECORD” in 2” high printed letters on each document. B. Keep record documents current.


95

C. Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded.

D. Record drawings: Legibly mark in red pencil to record actual construction. 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to survey datum.

2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements.

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Change Order or field order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings.

E. Specification Addenda: Legibly mark up each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product

and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Change Order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified.

F. Shop Drawings: Maintain as record documents; legibly annotate drawings to record changes made after review.

G. Job Photographs: Photograph all project areas to clearly record site conditions before, during and after the project construction.

1.03 SUBMITTAL

A. Deliver record documents to Architect/Engineer at final completion of project. Release of retainage is contingent on receipt of record documents in Architect/Engineer approved order as herein specified.

B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor’s name and address. 4. Title and number of each record document.

5. Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative.


END OF SECTION


96

SECTION 01900 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Bid items to include all foreseeable work associated with the completion of the project.

B. Measurement: 1. Generally, the work actually performed or items actually installed.

2. Conducted by the Contractor and observed by the Owner’s Representative. C. Payment: 1. Include all associated materials and work.

2. Additional payments shall not be made for any “item” of work not in the “Bid”, except work considered to be unforeseen and unusual. Architect/Engineer’s decision of additional payment shall be final.

3. Payments for bid items shall be unchanged except for minor adjustment (± 2%) in design ordered by the Architect/Engineer during the work.

1.02 CHANGES IN SCOPE

A. Additional payment may be made for unforeseen or unusual work conducted by order of the Architect/Engineer, and for major additions to the work.

B. Dewatering shall not be considered unforeseen or unusual work. C. Major subtractions from the work shall constitute a lessening of the item bid

payment. D. Adjustments in payment shall be made at a negotiated price as per contract

conditions. E. Items of work not specifically ordered by the Architect/Engineer shall not be

additional pay items. F. Additional pay items shall be allowed only when work is executed pursuant to the

Architect/Engineer’s prior written instruction. A Change Order shall be issued in accordance with the General Conditions.

G. Measurement for payment of additional pay items shall be agreed upon daily between the Contractor and Architect/Engineer. Payments shall include provision of granular material, disposal of excavated material, and all other needed features of the work performed.

H. Planting of vegetation indicated on the Plans shall be included in the lump sum bids for a particular item of work. The Contractor shall not be paid the entire bid amount, less the amount indicated for planting and less specified retainage, until the vegetation has been planted and accepted.

PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used Part 3 EXECUTION


97

3.01 MEASUREMENT A. Generally, the percentage of the total required work actually performed or items

actually installed per the approved Schedule of Values. B. Conducted by the Contractor and observed by the Owner’s Representative.

3.02 PAYMENT A. Include all associated materials and work.

B. Additional payments shall not be made for any “item” of work not in the “Bid”, except work considered to be unforeseen and unusual, or for change in scope when ordered by Architect/Engineer in form of written instructions.

END OF SECTION


98

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PROJECT MANUAL

ADVENTURE CENTRAL –

KITCHEN MODIFICATIONS & UPGRADES

2222 JAMES H. MCGEE BLVD – DAYTON, OHIO

21 JUNE 2019 3695800

Five Rivers MetroParks 3695800

Adventure Central – Kitchen Modifications & Upgrades 06/21/2019

SPECIFICATIONS – TABLE OF CONTENTS 001000 - 1

SPECIFICATIONS – TABLE OF CONTENTS

00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

001000 - SPECIFICATIONS – TABLE OF CONTENTS

01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 - SUMMARY

013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

017300 - EXECUTION

02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

03 – CONCRETE

033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

04 – MASONRY

042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

05 – METALS

NOT USED

06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

061600 - SHEATHING

066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS

074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

08 – OPENINGS

081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS

083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

087100 - DOOR HARDWARE




09 – FINISHES

092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

093013 - CERAMIC TILING

095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

10 - SPECIALTIES

104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

11 – EQUIPMENT

114000 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

12 – FURNISHINGS

NOT USED

13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

NOT USED

22 – PLUMBING

220519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

221124 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

230000 - HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

230700 - HVAC INSULATION




232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

233113 - METAL DUCTS

233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

235416.13 - GAS-FIRED FURNACES

237413 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

238127 - DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER

26 – ELECTRICAL

260010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

260015 - SUBMITTALS

260020 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

260025 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

260519 - WIRE, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS

260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

260533 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

262416 - PANELBOARDS

262726 - WIRING DEVICES

264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

265213 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

27 – COMMUNICATIONS

NOT USED

28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT USED

31 – EARTHWORK

313116 - TERMITE CONTROL

32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

NOT USED

33 – UTILITIES

NOT USED



SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information.

2. Work covered by Contract Documents.

3. Contractor's use of site and premises.

4. Coordination with occupants.

5. Work restrictions.

6. Specification and Drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Adventure Central – Kitchen Modifications & Upgrades.

1. Project Location: 2222 James H. McGee Blvd., Dayton, Ohio.

B. Owner: Five Rivers MetroParks.

1. Owner's Representative: Joe Zimmerman, 937-277-4825,

[email protected].

C. Architect: Barge Design Solutions, 1370 Vanguard Blvd., Miamisburg, Ohio 45342.

1. Architect's Representative: Timothy J. Finney, AIA, 937-428-5278,

[email protected].

D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals, who have

prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. Plumbing, Mechanical, and Electrical: Advanced Engineering Consultants.

2. Food Service Equipment: Vorndran & Associates.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:



SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. The project consists of modifications, additions, and upgrades to the existing kitchen at

Adventure Central and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Restricted Use of Site: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction

operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of

this Section.

B. Limits on Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb

portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits on Use of Site: Confine construction operations to Contractor staging / laydown

area indicated on Drawings and to areas where the Work is being performed.

2. Driveways, Walkways, and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances

serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency

vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials.

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction

operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by

construction operations.

D. Condition of Existing Grounds: Maintain portions of existing grounds, landscaping, and

hardscaping affected by construction operations throughout construction period. Repair damage

caused by construction operations.

1.5 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period,

with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction

operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to

interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets, work on public streets, rights of way,

and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or

others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary

utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.



SUMMARY 011000 - 3

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

C. Noise, Vibration, Dust, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise

and vibration, dust, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

D. Smoking and Controlled Substance Restrictions: Use of tobacco products, alcoholic beverages,

and other controlled substances on Owner's property is not permitted.

E. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on

Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.

1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The

words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Text Color: Text used in the Specifications, including units of measure, manufacturer and

product names, and other text may appear in multiple colors or underlined as part of a

hyperlink; no emphasis is implied by text with these characteristics.

3. Hypertext: Text used in the Specifications may contain hyperlinks. Hyperlinks may allow

for access to linked information that is not residing in the Specifications. Unless

otherwise indicated, linked information is not part of the Contract Documents.

4. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated

otherwise.

B. Division 00 Contracting Requirements: General provisions of the Contract, including General

and Supplementary Conditions, apply to all Sections of the Specifications.

C. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work

of all Sections in the Specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000



ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1

SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance work

performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.

B. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in material

type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by Architect.

C. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match original,

or as otherwise indicated.

D. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and finishes. This

includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing or upgrading

materials.

E. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original item is

the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.

F. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.

1.3 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK

A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, conduct

conference at Project site.

1. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work,

including review of the following:

a. Fire-prevention plan.

b. Governing regulations.

c. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection.

d. Hauling routes.

e. Sequence of alteration work operations.

f. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated items.

g. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where

materials are stored.

2. Reporting: Record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and

to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from conference.




B. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work at

weekly or bi-weekly intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held

for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress of alteration work. Include

topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

2. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to

others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Historic items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their

contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to

Owner that may be encountered or uncovered during the Work, regardless of whether they were

previously documented, remain Owner's property.


A. Title X Requirement: Each firm conducting activities that disturb painted surfaces shall be a

"Lead-Safe Certified Firm" according to 40 CFR 745, Subpart E, and use only workers that are

trained in lead-safe work practices.

B. Alteration Work Program: Prepare a written plan for alteration work for whole Project,

including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during operations.

Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this and other Sections.

Coordinate this whole-Project alteration work program with specific requirements of programs

required in other alteration work Sections.

1. Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and noise-control

partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated with continuing on-site

operations and other known work in progress.

2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning radii,

and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.

C. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work, including

placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-control devices during

each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection equipment and

requirements. Include fire-watch personnel's training, duties, and authority to enforce fire

safety.

D. Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.

1.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS

A. Salvaged Materials:




1. Clean loose dirt and debris from salvaged items unless more extensive cleaning is

indicated.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning; cushion against damage during handling. Label

contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

B. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:

1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during handling.

Label contents of containers.


4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections, supports, and

miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and

soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be dismantled and

taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work and reinstalled in their

original locations after alteration and other construction work in the vicinity is complete.

D. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are protected from

moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.

1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its original

location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or photographs by

annotating the identifying marks.

2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.

3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5 deg F (3

deg C) or more above the dew point.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and

surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.

1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being

protected.

2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the public from

areas where alteration work is being performed.

3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes.




4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and

vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work.

5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from reaching the

public or adjacent surfaces.

6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural elements.

7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and staining.

8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from other

areas of the building.

B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:

1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not remove

existing materials unless otherwise indicated.

2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as part of the

alteration work program.

C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and precautions.

Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people and adjacent materials,

components, and vegetation.

D. Utility and Communications Services:

1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or

controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work before

commencing operations.

2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as

required for alteration work.

3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect against

damage during operations. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing

utilities.

E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it is

functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or blockage. Do not

begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning properly.

1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the

drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or blocked by

sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.

2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only clean

water to pass.

F. Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of work in an area, install roofing protection.

3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE

A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:

1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated. Perform duties titled

"Owner's Responsibility for Fire Protection."




2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste, and

chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.

a. If combustible material cannot be removed, provide fire blankets to cover such

materials.

B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following procedures

while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials, including

welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat, or other operations where

open flames or implements using high heat or combustible solvents and chemicals are

anticipated:

1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of welding or other high-heat

equipment. Use of open-flame equipment is not permitted. Notify Owner at least 72

hours before each occurrence, indicating location of such work.

2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside the

building.

3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas where

flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present. Use a

combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.

4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other high-temperature

material from reaching surrounding combustible material.

5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows, doors,

holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.

6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible materials,

station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such work is performed.

Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire safety. Station fire watch

according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:

a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and alarms.

b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction from

fire-watch duties.

c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch personnel are not

present.

d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day beginning

no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work to detect hidden or smoldering

fires and to ensure that proper fire prevention is maintained.

C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag buckets for

disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the type of fire risk in

each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch personnel are trained in fire-

extinguisher and blanket use.

D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without interruption

while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to sprinklers, shield

them temporarily with guards.

1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are paused, and

when nearby work is complete.




3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS

A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and surrounding

buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and adhesives.

B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals selected for

Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as indicated in alteration

work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that are waterproof and UV resistant

and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to which they are applied. Apply protective

materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents

or adhesives to painted or porous surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective

materials.

C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected surfaces.

D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner that

prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to

landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.

3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK

A. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from

alterations.

B. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether from

environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or thawing or from

structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.

1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.




TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.2 USE CHARGES

A. Installation, removal, and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract

Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities engaged in the Project to use temporary

services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, occupants of Project,

testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections

and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is

available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections

and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the United States Access

Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating, Cooling, and Dehumidifying Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being

consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and

marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille

in system and remove at end of construction.

C. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-

stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given

to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to

minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that

are designated as Owner's property.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.




1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for

construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, safety shower and eyewash

facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of

authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures

and facilities.

E. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by

construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed

construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that

will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

1. Provide temporary dehumidification systems when required to reduce ambient and

substrate moisture levels to level required to allow installation or application of finishes

and their proper curing or drying.

F. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering

occupied areas.

G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,

capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

B. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

C. Storage and Staging: Use designated areas of Project site for storage and staging needs.




D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Temporary Signs: Provide signs as required to inform public and individuals seeking

entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

2. Maintain and touch up signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste

from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and

other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be

removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

1. Where access to adjacent properties is required in order to affect protection of existing

facilities, obtain written permission from adjacent property owner to access property for

that purpose.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible

air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent

properties and walkways, according to requirements of EPA and authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction

activity do not enter or cross tree- or plant-protection zones.

2. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during

construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

3. Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and

sedimentation from Project site during the course of Project.




4. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed

during removal.

D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide

barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of

stormwater from heavy rains.

E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using materials approved by authorities

having jurisdiction.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of

construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and

similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each workday.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

I. Temporary Egress: Provide temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and

as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide signage directing occupants to temporary

egress.

J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress

and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar

activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

K. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.

2. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by

authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.

3. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

L. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241; manage fire-prevention program.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. Comply with additional limits on smoking

specified in other Sections.




2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Moisture and Mold Protection: Protect stored materials and installed Work in accordance with

Moisture and Mold Protection Plan.

B. Exposed Construction Period: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject

to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Protect porous materials from water damage.

2. Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.

3. Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

4. Remove standing water from decks.

5. Keep deck openings covered or dammed.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Period: After installation of weather barriers but before full

enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration

of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with

high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.

3. Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.

4. Discard or replace water-damaged material.

5. Do not install material that is wet.

6. Discard and replace stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.

7. Perform work in a sequence that allows wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in gypsum board or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Period: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but

prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Use temporary or permanent HVAC system to control humidity within ranges specified

for installed and stored materials.

3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.




1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended,

when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial

Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been

delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed

surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in

Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the

Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Installation of the Work.

3. Cutting and patching.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected portions

of the building.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of

subsequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after

installation of subsequent work.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of

construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, or when

encountering the need for cutting and patching of elements whose structural function is

not known, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from

Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting

and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change

their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components

in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in

increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or

components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in




reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or

decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual

evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner

that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and

replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written

recommendations and instructions for installation of specified products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed

surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent

possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,

will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of

in-place materials. Use materials that are not considered hazardous.

C. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous

to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical

systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, gas service piping, and water-service piping; underground

electrical services; and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the

Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where

indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance. Record observations.




1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding

with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances

located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect in

accordance with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawing in relation to existing conditions. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect

promptly.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as

indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb, and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and

90 inches (2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.




B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure satisfactory results as judged

by Architect. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial

Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations, so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy of type expected for

Project.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction

items on-site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Select tools or equipment that minimize production of excessive noise

levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for Work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with

indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size

and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with

other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size

and type required for load conditions with manufacturer.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with

integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to

Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed Work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect, as judged by Architect. Fit exposed connections together

to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work.

1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and

replacing defective Work.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.




1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their

original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not

to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be

exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free

passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with

requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems

are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before

cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar

operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or

adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply

with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with

minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be

removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent

entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations

following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as

practicable, as judged by Architect. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements

specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to

demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching

and refinishing.




a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing

materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area

into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even

surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall

coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and

appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and

intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final

paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch, corner to corner of

wall and edge to edge of ceiling. Provide additional coats until patch blends with

adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane

surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,

mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.

Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if

the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors

are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where Work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.




D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from

damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials

down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise

deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation

without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION AND REPAIR OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair Work previously completed and subsequently damaged during construction period.

Repair to like-new condition.




C. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain

undisturbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the

Work.

D. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.




SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones

and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to

Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.


A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the

Work.

1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate

contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.




F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so

as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition

operations.

B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any

element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or

adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.




B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas

to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and

make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent

injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as

required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and

finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of

construction being demolished.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.




2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

3. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site.


D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.


4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials

necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling

during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,

protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved

construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, and other pozzolans materials

subject to compliance with requirements.

B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each of the following.

1. Admixtures:

a. Include limitations of use, including restrictions on cementitious materials,

supplementary cementitious materials, air entrainment, aggregates, temperature at

time of concrete placement, relative humidity at time of concrete placement, curing

conditions, and use of other admixtures.

2. Vapor retarders.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:

1. Mixture identification.

2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.

3. Durability exposure class.

4. Maximum w/cm.

5. Calculated equilibrium unit weight, for lightweight concrete.

6. Slump limit.

7. Air content.

8. Nominal maximum aggregate size.

9. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if

permitted.

10. Intended placement method.

11. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions,

weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.





A. Ready-Mixed Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing

ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for

production facilities and equipment.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301 (ACI 301M).


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) unless modified by requirements in the

Contract Documents.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.

3. Slag Cement: ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100 or 120.

4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C595/C595M.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

D. Water and Water Used to Make Ice: ASTM C94/C94M, potable.

2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Sheet Vapor Retarder, Class A: ASTM E1745, Class A; not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm) thick.

Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.




2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs,

based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 25 percent by mass.

2. Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass.

3. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans, Slag Cement: 50 percent by mass, with fly ash or

pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent by mass.

4. Total of Fly Ash or Other Pozzolans: 35 percent by mass with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent by mass.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and

workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Normal-weight concrete.

1. Exposure Class: ACI 318 (ACI 318M).

2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.

3. Maximum w/cm: 0.50.

4. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m).

5. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm), plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

6. Air Content:

a. Do not use an air-entraining admixture or allow total air content to exceed 3

percent for concrete used in trowel-finished floors.

7. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 1.00 percent by weight

of cement.




2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete in accordance with

ASTM C94/C94M and ASTM C1116/C1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining Work that

is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.

1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with

items to be embedded.

2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDER

A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder in accordance with

ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install vapor retarder with longest dimension parallel with direction of concrete pour.

2. Face laps away from exposed direction of concrete pour.

3. Lap vapor retarder over footings and grade beams not less than 6 inches (150 mm),

sealing vapor retarder to concrete.

4. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

5. Terminate vapor retarder at the top of floor slabs, grade beams, and pile caps, sealing

entire perimeter to floor slabs, grade beams, foundation walls, or pile caps.

6. Seal penetrations in accordance with vapor retarder manufacturer's instructions.

7. Protect vapor retarder during placement of reinforcement and concrete.

a. Repair damaged areas by patching with vapor retarder material, overlapping

damages area by 6 inches (150 mm) on all sides, and sealing to vapor retarder.

3.3 JOINTS

A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired.

2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.

a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and

slabs.




C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning concrete

into areas. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness

as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of control joints after

applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive

or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when

cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete

develops random cracks.

D. Doweled Joints:

1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete bonding to one

side of joint.

3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded items,

and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.

1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage and deficient

installation, and repair defective areas.

2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and make

necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless

approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M), but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete

delivery ticket.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to

mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new

concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness.

1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.

2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.




4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in accordance with

ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly

penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer.

c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose

plasticity.

d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate

concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items

without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of

construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.

2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.

6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.

8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.5 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M) Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-

facing material.

a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide or 1/2 inch (13 mm) deep.

b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch (25 mm).

c. Tie holes do not require patching.

d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 (ACI 117M) Class D.

3.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing

operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry

tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly

scarify surface with a fine broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.




C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete slabs.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In:

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in place

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.

3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

3.8 CONCRETE CURING

A. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

1. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306.1 for cold weather protection during

curing.

2. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather

protection during curing.

3. Maintain moisture loss no more than 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h), calculated in

accordance with ACI 305.1,) before and during finishing operations.

3.9 TOLERANCES

A. Conform to ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:

1. Protect from petroleum stains.

2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.

3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.

4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.

5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.

6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.




CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1

SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Steel reinforcing bars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit

masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice

or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost

or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in

TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in

TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to

contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such

defects are exposed in the completed Work.




2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces

of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,

bonding, and other special conditions.

B. CMUs: ASTM C90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2800 psi (19.3 MPa).

2. Density Classification: Normal weight.

2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification;

and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less

than that of CMUs.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-

weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color

indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing

no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M.

E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use

in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C979/C979M. Use only pigments with a record of

satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C494/C494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of

composition indicated.

I. Water: Potable.




2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M or ASTM A996/A996M, Grade 60

(Grade 420).

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-

mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars

indicated.

C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A951/A951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.

3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.

4. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c.

5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. Provide the

following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for

interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other

applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour

height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for

specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa).

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to

ASTM C143/C143M.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous

pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,

unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut

units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12

mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or

minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus

or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4

inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6

m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet

(6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and

expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3

mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm

in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch

(3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8

inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus

1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.




Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at

other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in

running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face

dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.

Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of

metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels,

posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint

thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8

inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a

minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls.

3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous

reinforcement.

B. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.




3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support

reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as

indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,

tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of

reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened

sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them

during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough

strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).

3.7 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar

fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Masonry Waste: Remove masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.




ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Wood blocking and nailers.

3. Plywood backing panels.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit

stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the

ALSC Board of Review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC

Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to

inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)

thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless

otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground.




1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.

D. Application: Treat the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or

concrete.

3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load bearing.

2. Species:

a. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.

b. Northern species; NLGA.

c. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

d. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.

B. Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade.

1. Application: Framing other than interior partitions not indicated as load bearing.

2. Species:

a. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

b. Southern pine; SPIB.

c. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.

d. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.

e. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.

f. Douglas fir-south; WWPA.

g. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.

h. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA.

i. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:




1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated

or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements

specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those indicated.

Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational

engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified

independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to

withstand same loads as framing anchors.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M,

G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M; structural steel (SS), high-

strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B

(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)

thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from

manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install

fasteners through each fastener hole.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code (IBC).

2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet

enough that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.




SHEATHING 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing.

2. Roof sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

2.2 ROOF SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: Exterior, Structural I sheathing.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with

ASTM A153/A153M.



SHEATHING 061600 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to

use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces

do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting

construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.

2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so

these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing

through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of

structural support elements.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood

Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at

edges of wall sheathing panels.

b. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.




PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes plastic sheet paneling.



B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.


A. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels

complying with ASTM D5319. Panels shall be USDA accepted for incidental food contact.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency

according to ASTM E84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable

testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).

3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture.

4. Color: White.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and

cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed

to conceal edges.

1. Color: Match panels.



PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2

B. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by

plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint

Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and

dust.

B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to

manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls

not less than half the width of full panels and so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than

12 inches (300 mm) wide.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples. Do not fasten through panels.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim

in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by

sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.




THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.

2. Glass-fiber blanket.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards."

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa) minimum

compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and

450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

1. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved

assembly.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET

A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-

developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E84; passing ASTM E136 for

combustion characteristics.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:

1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and

smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E84.

2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum

flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84.

B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.




PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and

applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,

rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill

voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,

and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or

required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's

recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below

exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from

exterior walls.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following

requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If

more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a

snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between

edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not

rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C1320.

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required

to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:




1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum

volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.




WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap.

2. Flexible flashing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed

indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E84; UV

stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 20 perms (1150 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) per

ASTM E96/E96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).

2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded

polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch (0.8 mm).

1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.



WEATHER BARRIERS 072500 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at

expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless


B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.

2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at

flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.

3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.




VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1

SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D4397, 6-mil- (0.15-mm-) thick sheet, with maximum

permeance rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING

A. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor

retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as

recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in

insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and

sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions.

Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor

retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and

vapor retarders.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.

Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.



VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2




FORMED METAL WALL PANELS 074213.13 - 1

SECTION 074213.13 - FORMED METAL WALL PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.



B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge

conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,

closures, and accessories; and special details.

C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within

specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-

applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) when tested

according to ASTM E283 at the following test-pressure difference:




1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

B. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to

ASTM E331 at the following test-pressure difference:

1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint

sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface

temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

2.2 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS

A. Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping side edges of

adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side

laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.

B. Vee-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, V-shaped ribs and

recesses that are approximately same size, evenly spaced across panel width, and with rib/recess

sides angled at approximately 45 degrees.

1. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with

ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated

steel sheet complying with ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating

designation; structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with

ASTM A755/A755M.

a. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch (1.02 mm).

b. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match existing.

2. Rib Spacing: 5.3 inches (135 mm) o.c.

3. Panel Coverage: 32 inches (813 mm).

4. Panel Height: 1.5 inches (38 mm).


A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel

sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized) coating designation or

ASTM A792/A792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation

unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and

alignment of metal panel system.

B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system

including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,




fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless


1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal panels.

2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from

material recommended by manufacturer.

3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or

closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, flexible closure

strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where

indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.

C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as

required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are

not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae,

parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as

adjacent metal panels.

D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed

fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of factory-applied coating.

Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.

E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible with

panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.

1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound

sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm)

thick.

2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturer's standard

procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements

demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and

structural requirements.

B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full

length of panel.

C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that

provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from

movements.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's

recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"

that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.




2.5 FINISHES

A. Panels and Accessories:

1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70

percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat.

2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support

members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written

recommendations.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at

location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib. Apply panels and associated items true to line for

neat and weathertight enclosure.

2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side

of metal panels.

3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use

proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of

washer.

4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress

washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in

predrilled holes.

5. Flash and seal panels with weather closures at perimeter of all openings.

B. Watertight Installation:

1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using

sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels; and

elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.

2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant

and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight

mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other

components.

D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation

instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners




where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,

and seams that are permanently watertight.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are

installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On

completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel

manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

END OF SECTION 074213.13



THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.

2. Cover board.



B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, including

the following:

1. Base flashings and membrane termination details.

2. Flashing details at penetrations.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. Roof membrane and flashings, of color required.



B. Certified statement from existing roof membrane manufacturer stating that existing roof

warranty has not been affected by Work performed under this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested

according to ASTM G152, ASTM G154, or ASTM G155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according to

ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM Approvals 4470.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes

indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of

applicable testing agency.

2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D6878/D6878M, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, fabric-backed TPO

sheet.

1. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.

2. Exposed Face Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range of options.

2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use

and compatible with other roofing components.

1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm)

thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.

C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.

D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.

E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or aluminum bars,

approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-

resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to

substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,

preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination

reglets, and other accessories.




2.4 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D312/D312M, Type III or Type IV or ASTM D6152/D6152M, SEBS

modified.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41/D41M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOFING, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, listed

roof assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast.

Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain

weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF COVER BOARDS

A. Install cover boards over sheathing with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints

staggered between rows. Offset joints of sheathing below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in

each direction.

1. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit tight to

intersecting sloping roof decks.

2. Cut and fit cover board tight to nailers, projections, and penetrations.

3. Adhere cover board to substrate using adhesive according to manufacturer’s instructions

and FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF ADHERED ROOF MEMBRANE

A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's

written instructions.

B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.

C. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum

dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.




D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required by

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not apply to splice

area of roof membrane.

E. Fabric-Backed Roof Membrane Adhesive: Apply to substrate at rate required by manufacturer,

and install fabric-backed roof membrane.

F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roof

membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut

edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with

requirements.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF BASE FLASHING

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to

roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow

to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet

flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side

and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through

termination bars.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect roofing system for

deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to

Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair

substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration

at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.




C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.




ROOF SPECIALTIES 077100 - 1

SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof-edge drainage systems.



B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties.

1. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to

other work. Distinguish between plant- and field-assembled work.

C. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace roof

specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified

warranty period.

1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Delta E units when tested according to ASTM D2244.

b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214.

c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components,

failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that

resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of thermal movements. Base calculations on

surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

2.2 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths, with matching ends, outlet tubes, and other

accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1 inch (25 mm) above front edge. Furnish flat-stock

gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same

metal as gutters.

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch (0.86-mm) thickness.

2. Gutter Profile: Style A according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

3. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.

B. Downspouts: Plain rectangular, manufactured from the following exposed metal. Furnish with

metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Nominal 0.034-inch (0.86-mm) thickness.

C. Zinc-Coated Steel Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet

performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color

of sheet metal.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip

zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A153/A153M or ASTM F2329.




B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class,

and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application.

C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited movement.

D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187/D1187M.

E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Coil-Coated Galvanized-Steel Sheet Finishes:

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal

surfaces to comply with ASTM A755/A755M and coating and resin manufacturers'

written instructions.

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less

than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) resin by weight in color coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties

securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,

protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as

required to complete roof-specialty systems.

1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning

and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.

2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant.

3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance. Verify

shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.

4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.

5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from

contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with

bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with

wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of

roof specialties for waterproof performance.

C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.




D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by

fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.

F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in

joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F (4 deg C).

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM

A. Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to

manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with

installation of roof-edge drainage system.

B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to firmly

anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) apart. Attach ends with

rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers

with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch (25 mm) away from

walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from building.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and

weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed.




JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.

2. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C1021 to conduct the testing

indicated.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not

comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified

warranty period.


B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or

replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements

specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C1248.




B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint

sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

2.3 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide

to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,

nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing

silicone joint sealant; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin),

and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum

sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to

comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.




C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation

instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling

agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. All exterior joints unless otherwise noted.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

c. All other interior joints unless otherwise noted.




2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.




HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.



B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of

supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,

fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as

specified.

B. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level 1; ANSI/SDI A250.4, Level C.

1. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).

c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.8 mm).

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.




e. Core: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Frames:

a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm).

b. Construction: Knocked down.

2.2 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame

standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.

2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames

with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches (610 mm) of

frame height above 7 feet (2.1 m).

B. Material: ASTM A879/A879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill

phosphatized.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for

exposed applications.

B. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A153/A153M.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations

require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or

angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners

unless otherwise indicated.

2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers

as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.

B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive templated

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to

ANSI/SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for

hardware.




2.5 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;

compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,

filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed

faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door

hardware.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent

anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without

damage to completed Work.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.

3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line

90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal

line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of

jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

3.3 REPAIR

A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of

prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.




B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint

according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in

painting Sections.




COILING COUNTER DOORS 083313 - 1

SECTION 083313 - COILING COUNTER DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Counter doors.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of coiling counter door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in

manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure.

2. Show locations of controls, locking devices, detectors or replaceable fusible links, and

other accessories.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COUNTER DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Counter Door: Coiling counter door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

50,000.

C. Door Curtain Material: Aluminum.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats.

E. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated aluminum

extrusion and finished to match door.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Aluminum with exposed finish matching curtain slats.




G. Integral Frame, Hood, and Fascia: Stainless steel.

1. Mounting: Between jambs.

H. Sill Configuration: Integral plastic laminate sill.

I. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day.

2. Motor Exposure: Interior.

3. Motor Electrical Characteristics:

a. Horsepower: 2 hp.

b. Voltage: 115-V ac, single phase, 60 Hz.

4. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.

5. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic pneumatic sensor edge on bottom bar.

6. Control Station(s): Interior-side mounted.

J. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with push/pull handles.

K. Door Finish:

1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodized.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate coiling counter door curtain of interlocking metal slats in a continuous

length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness

and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type

of door indicated.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material

and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain

curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide

adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.4 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at

opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and

bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any

portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with

intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.




2.5 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible

gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting

handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.6 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a

spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-

lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel

plate.

2.7 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by

door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and

factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch,

control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for

proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than

number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated

for each door assembly.

1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated,

large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at

a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s),

without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring:

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated

doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Pneumatic Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal mounted

to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.




E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-

button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button

control labeled "Close."

1. Type: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose

NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for

emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation

does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

G. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect

mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency

manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount

mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent

motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

H. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install coiling counter doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written

instructions and as specified.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate doors to confirm

proper motor rotation and door performance.

B. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply

with specified requirements.

C. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly

installations comply with specified requirements.




OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 083323 - 1

SECTION 083323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service doors.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in

manufacturer's product data.

1. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed

on structure.

2. Show locations of controls, locking devices detectors or replaceable fusible links, and

other accessories.



A. Special warranty.

B. Maintenance data.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than

50,000.




C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats.

E. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch (38 by 38 by 3 mm)

thick; fabricated from hot-dip galvanized steel and finished to match door.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

G. Hood: Galvanized steel.

1. Mounting: Face of wall.

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and

outside, with cylinder.

I. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Medium duty, up to 12 cycles per hour and up to 50 cycles per day.

2. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial or

industrial use.

3. Motor Exposure: Exterior, wet, and humid.

4. Motor Electrical Characteristics:

a. Horsepower: 3 hp.

b. Voltage: 115-V ac, single phase, 60 Hz.

5. Emergency Manual Operation: Push-up type.

6. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar; self-

monitoring type.

7. Control Station(s): Exterior mounted.

J. Curtain Accessories: Equip door with weatherseals.

K. Door Finish:

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to

withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.




Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended

by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material

and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain

curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide

adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.4 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at

opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and

bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any

portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with

intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

2.5 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating

handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

1. Lock Cylinders: As standard with manufacturer and keyed to building keying system.

2. Keys: Two.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage

power supply when door is locked.

2.6 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted

to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise

indicated.

2.7 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an

adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a

spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-

lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel

plate.

2.8 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by

door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and




factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch,

control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for

proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.

2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6, with

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than

number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Motors: Reversible-type motor for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly.

1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated,

large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at

a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s),

without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring:

Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

D. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated

automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening.

1. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather

stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device. Connect to control

circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire-configured device designed to interface with

door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

E. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-

button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button

control labeled "Close."

1. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof

type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

F. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for

emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation

does not exceed 25 lbf (111 N).

G. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,

anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written

instructions and as specified.

B. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.


A. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply

with specified requirements.

B. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly

installations comply with specified requirements.




ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1

SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, accessories, and details of installation,

including anchor, flashing, and sealant installation.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

b. Glazing Units: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

c. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and

minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless

more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window.

B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:

1. Minimum Performance Class: LC.

2. Minimum Performance Grade: 25.

C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x

deg F (2.0 W/sq. m x K).




D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of 0.30.

E. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal

performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.

F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal

movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface

temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of

joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation

on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C) ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C) material

surfaces.

2.2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

A. Types: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with

AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.

1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an

integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior materials

and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that eliminates direct metal-

to-metal contact.

C. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E2190.

1. Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear.

b. Kind: Fully tempered.

2. Lites: Two.

3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon.

D. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weathertight

seal.

E. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware sized to

accommodate sash weight and dimensions.

F. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and

other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible. For

application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.




2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills that form a pan to prevent water

intrusion.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling

components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.

C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.

D. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory

to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and

installation.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum

Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals;

Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as

specified below). Apply baked enamel complying with paint manufacturer's written instructions

for cleaning, conversion coating, and painting.

1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting, modified-acrylic or polyester enamel primer/topcoat

system complying with AAMA 2603, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5

mils (0.04 mm)], medium gloss.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories,

and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in

manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal

movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall

flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.

C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture

migrating within windows to the exterior.




D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic

action at points of contact with other materials.

E. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective

coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

F. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during

construction period.




DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.

1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Door hardware schedule.

C. Keying schedule.


A. Sample warranty.




A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved

by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during

the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and

keying.




1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise

indicated below:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door

hardware schedule.

1. Door hardware is scheduled on Drawings.

2.2 HINGES

A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow-metal

doors and hollow-metal frames.

2.3 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.

B. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

C. Lock Trim:

1. Levers: Cast.

2. Escutcheons (Roses): Stamped.

D. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with

requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended

to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.

E. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.

2.4 LOCK CYLINDERS

A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel

silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.




B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to match

lockset.

1. Core Type: Removable.

C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction

keys without cylinder removal. Provide 5 construction master keys.

2.5 KEYING

A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix.

Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference.

B. Keys: Brass.

1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include

the following notation:

a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

2.6 SURFACE CLOSERS

A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep and

latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm. Comply with

manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure

to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet

field conditions and requirements for opening force.

2.7 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.

2.8 THRESHOLDS

A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.

2.9 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE

A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 and to match existing.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless

otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where

cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be

painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface

protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes

have been completed on substrates involved.

C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than

the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30

inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of

support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant

complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

E. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door

hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper

operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.

Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating

equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE




GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C1396/C1396M.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C475/C475M.

B. Joint Tape:




1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C1002 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

D. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim

edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting

structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for

panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for other materials.




3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.




CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Quarry tile.

2. Crack isolation membrane.

3. Metal edge strips.



B. Samples:

1. Each type of tile and for each color and finish required.

1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and

that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing

contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for

types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with

ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced

by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements

specified.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed square-edged quarry tile.

1. Face Size: 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm).

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).

3. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive, smooth.




4. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.

5. Finish: Mat, clear glaze.

6. Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

7. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

8. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,

selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Base: Coved, face size 6 by 6 inches (152 by 152 mm).

2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for standard

performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include

reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.

B. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based

formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations

indicated.

B. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change

color or appearance of grout.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for

compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting

performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are

incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other




substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances

required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with

surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset

mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-

setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and

packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from

other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to

manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA

installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the

ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA

installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and

grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete

covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at

obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring

visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for

straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other

penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are

flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize

the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise

indicated.

G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:

1. Quarry Tile: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).




H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,

contraction, and isolation joints, where recommended by the tile manufacturer and TCNA.

Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints

after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above

them.

I. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove

excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

J. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written

instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125-Full; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane.

a. Thinset Mortar: Modified dry-set mortar.

b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.




ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E1264.

2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E1264.

B. Color: White.

C. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

D. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

E. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2

2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM

A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension

system and accessories according to ASTM C635/C635M.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll

formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip

galvanized, G30 (Z90) coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide metal

caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.

2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.

3. Face Design: Flat, flush.

4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum.

5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.4 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not

indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations; formed from sheet

metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system

runners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at

opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless


B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C636/C636M and manufacturer's written

instructions.

B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and

where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of

moldings before they are installed.




RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Thermoset-rubber base.

2. Rubber molding accessories.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE

A. Product Standard: ASTM F1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,

homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. Style B, Cove.

B. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

C. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

D. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.

E. Outside Corners: Job formed.

F. Inside Corners: Job formed.

G. Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.

2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Description: Rubber transition strips.

B. Profile and Dimensions: As necessary for changes in flooring materials.




C. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer’s full range.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are

to be installed.

D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.




2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length.

a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.




EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

exterior substrates:

1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Masonry (CMUs): 12 percent.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.


A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss.




INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following

interior substrates:

1. Galvanized metal.

2. Gypsum board.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss.

B. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell.




FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1

SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire

extinguishers.




A. Operation and maintenance data.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable

Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent

testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounting bracket indicated.

1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,

Appendix B.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2

B. Regular Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 10 lb. nominal capacity, with sodium bicarbonate-based

dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire

extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers

indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,

spacing, and location.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with

requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Mounting Brackets: Top of fire extinguisher to be at 42 inches (1067 mm) above finished

floor.

C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations

indicated.


Five Rivers MetroParks 3695800 Adventure Central – Kitchen Modifications & Upgrades 04/10/2019

FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1

SECTION 11 40 00 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary conditions, and the Sections included under Division 1, General Requirements, are included as a part of this Section as though bound herein.

B. K.E.C. may offer voluntary alternates by submittal in writing, along with supporting

literature and other data, at the time the bid is submitted. Voluntary Alternates shall not be confused with items listed as "equals" in the item specifications. Although they will be given consideration after award of the Contract, voluntary alternates will not be considered in the judgment about award of the Contract. Change in the Contract price proposed for the voluntary alternate(s) shall reflect all possible costs to be encountered should the voluntary alternate(s) be accepted and incorporated in the work.

C. If the K.E.C. discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions of the Contract

Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not reasonably inferred from the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall include in their bid the most stringent and demanding, or highest cost, requirement.

D. The utility schedule information is based on the prime spec equipment shown in the

specifications. In the event the K.E.C. proposes to furnish an approved equal to the prime spec equipment, the K.E.C. shall be responsible for any upcharges incurred because of plumbing, mechanical, or electrical changes necessary for the equipment being provided

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide labor and materials required to deliver, uncrate, assemble, set in place, level, install, supervise, and coordinate the installation of the food service equipment and accessories as indicated on drawings and as specified, exclusive of utility connections.

B. Utility roughs-ins, final connections, and interconnection of components will be performed

by Divisions 22 and 26.

1. Work provided by Division 22 shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Rough-in mechanical and plumbing services

b. Drain line piping and components from the rough-in to the equipment connections.

c. Supply line piping and components from the rough-in to the equipment

connections.

d. Traps, strainers, unions, piping, service valves and vents.

e. Install escutcheons on utility lines which extend through equipment.

06/21/2019



f. Install faucets, pre-rinse assemblies, quick disconnect assemblies, hose station,

pot fillers, and vacuum breakers, and check valves and flow control valves as furnished with the equipment.

g. Disconnection of existing equipment which is to be removed or relocated.

h. Paint, or chrome sleeve, all exposed water and gas piping (above counter

height or in a direct line of sight) as directed by the Architect.

2. Work provided by Division 26 shall include, but not be limited to the following:

a. Rough-in electrical service.

b. Conduit and conductors from the rough-in to the equipment and between remote controls and the equipment.

c. Electrical outlets in walls, floor, and ceiling.

d. Disconnect switches as required by the electrical code.

e. Disconnection of existing equipment which is to be removed or relocated.

3. Work provided by various other trades shall include, but not be limited to, the

following:

a. Raised concrete or masonry bases and platforms.

b. Floor depressions, wall openings, recesses and holes through walls, floor, and ceiling as required for piping and ducts.

4. Refer to item specifications for additional work and requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. The term "Kitchen Equipment Contractor", "Contractor", or "K.E.C." is defined as the person or company that will contract for the work specified in this section.

B. The Consultant for this section of the work is FOOD SERVICE CONSULTANTS, INC.,

DBA VORNDRAN AND ASSOCIATES, 3125 STERLING RIDGE COVE, FORT WAYNE, INDIANA 46825-1704. The Consultant is responsible to the Architect for ascertaining that the work complies with the requirements of this section.

C. The term "provide" is defined as "Contractor furnish and install."

D. Transmit reports, submissions, questions, or correspondence to the Architect for

distribution. 1.04 SUBMITTAL

A. Refer to Section 01 33 23 and Section 01 77 00.

06/21/2019



B. Submit one (1) set of shop drawings (in PDF format) for review. Upon final review of

drawings, distribute prints to the various trades.

C. Shop drawings to include a plan, elevation, and cross sections through each equipment item. Indicate anchor devices, reinforcements, dimensions, gauges, holes, radii, cutouts and details of construction, installation, and relation to adjoining work. Do not start fabrication until final reviews are received. Draft shop drawings at 1 inch per foot scale.

D. Rough-in drawings to show accurately the curbs, platforms, gutters, sleeves, pipe stubs,

refrigerant lines, water supply lines, drains, floor drains, electrical services and other utility connections required. Coordinate work with the various trades. Draft rough-in drawings at ½ inch per foot scale.

E. Submit product data brochures for review prior to equipment purchase. Brochure to

contain a product data sheet for each manufacturer, along with a typewritten cover sheet indicating the item number, quantity, manufacturer, and model number, mechanical and electrical services required, and a listing of accessories specified. Assemble cover sheet and literature in order. Partial lists submitted from time to time will be rejected. Bind brochure in a three (3) ring hard back black binder.

F. Ventilation system shop drawings shall include a scaled roof plan indicating the locations

of the exhaust duct termination in comparison to other roof equipment in the same area and information on automatic power/fuel shut-off to cooking appliances in accordance with provisions in Ohio Mechanical Code and Ohio Building Code.

G. Submit, when requested, a copy of the manufacturer's order acknowledgement for each

item of pre-fabricated equipment. Acknowledgement to show date item was ordered and the scheduled shipping date.

H. Submit samples when requested. Samples will not be returned unless specifically

requested.

I. Guarantee equipment and accessories for one (1) year from date of substantial completion. covering replacement cost and/or labor cost of defective material and adjustment of controls. School projects shall be guaranteed for one (1) year from the date of the first day of the school opening. Provide a five (5) year parts and labor warranty for ALL remote refrigeration components for the walk-ins, and a five (5) year compressor only warranty for all self-contained refrigerated units.

J. Submit operating / maintenance manuals prior to completion of work. Manual to contain

directions and recommendations for the operation, care, adjustment, service, and maintenance of equipment. Provide parts list and diagrams showing parts location and assembly. Provide one (1) copy of the manual in PDF format. Identify each item of equipment with bookmarks. Arrange in alphabetical order.

K. Submit a listing of the name and address of equipment manufacturers used, along with the

name and address of the local service agencies. Include listing as a part of the maintenance and operation manuals.

06/21/2019



L. Submit three signed copies of pressure vessel inspection report. Inspector's report to be completed by a qualified pressure vessel inspector. Test all pressure equipment.


A. Manufacture and install equipment and accessories in strict compliance with and, if applicable, bear the seal of UL, NEMA, ASME, NSF, AGA, ANSI, OSHA and NFPA.

B. Manufacture and install equipment in strict conformity with Public Health Service

Publication - "Food Service Sanitation Manual" and applicable governmental codes and regulations.

C. Provide safety guards on equipment in compliance with codes.

D. Approval of contractor's drawings and other data does not relieve the Contractor from

responsibility of complying with codes and regulations.

E. Provide, at no extra charge, equipment, trim and accessories which may be required by codes and regulations.

F. The custom equipment fabricator will be subject to the acceptance of the Architect,

Consultant, and Owner. Fabricator must have the plant, personnel, and engineering facilities to properly design, detail and fabricate high quality equipment. Equipment shall be of standard unit assembly, manufactured by one manufacturer and of uniform design, material, and finish.

G. Manufacturer's catalog designations are intended to represent the standards required.

Equipment furnished must closely conform thereto in design, construction, capacity, and function, to the manufacturer and model specified. Where catalog designations are given, the items shall be complete as described and shown in the catalog, unless exceptions are specified.

1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Acquire approved "off-site" storage to house equipment if provisions cannot be made at the job site.

B. Ship fittings to the job site as follows:

1. Wrap and identify with tag naming the job, the supplier, the items enclosed and the

item to which it is to be attached at the job.

2. Fittings to be delivered to various trades involved. Obtain a receipt signed by the foreman.

3. Do not ship fittings or accessories inside larger items of equipment.

C. Continuously maintain protection of work from damage. Protect the Owner's property and

that of other contractors from injury or loss arising about this contract, and repair or replace damage, injury or loss. Damage to equipment not directly attributed to separate trades shall be the responsibility of the K.E.C.

06/21/2019



D. Permanently fasten manufacturer’s nameplates to the equipment. One nameplate of the

fabricator will be allowed in each room.

E. Equipment of a like nature (cooking batteries, carts, self-leveling dispensers, etc.) shall be of one manufacturer to insure uniformity of design and to simplify service and maintenance.


A. Prior to fabrication of equipment, field measure and verify in-place construction.

B. Fit equipment into the space provided regardless of the manufacturer's standards. Variations in equipment not recessed or built into fixed spaces, shall in no case be sufficient to materially change capacity of the equipment.

C. Field inspect conditions at site and verify that the rough-ins were properly installed.

Compensate the various trades for relocations of rough-ins caused by inaccuracy of drawings.

D. Notify the Consultant and Architect in writing of discrepancies between the contract

documents and the actual conditions on the job site prior to equipment fabrication.

E. Pay for the cost incurred for special equipment; for removal or replacement of portions of the building if required for delivery and installation of equipment specified; as well as other costs incurred if work specified under this section must be done by others due to jurisdictional agreements or other conditions.

F. Coordinate work specified under "WORK BY OTHERS", or other work that may arise

incidental to completing the project. Furnish installing trades with information and assistance for the proper installation of equipment and components.

G. Supervise the installation of the equipment and components. Submit to the Architect the

name, address and telephone number of the supervisor. The Contractor agrees to accept collect telephone calls from the Consultant or Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MECHANICAL WORK INCLUDED IN CONTRACT

A. Work provided by this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Chrome plated faucets with check valves, swing spout, soft flow aerators, and union coupling inlets. Equip faucets for 160° to 180° hot water with heat resistant red handle. Faucets and components shall be as follows:

a. Pre-Rinse, Backsplash T & S B 2278-01 w/ B-107C Chicago Faucet 510 / 902B / 851 Fisher 2210 / 2902 / 2925

06/21/2019



b. Faucet, Backsplash T & S B-0231-CR with B-199-2-F-12 aerator (1.20 gpm) Chicago Faucet 540LD Fisher 3252

c. Faucet, ¾" Backsplash mounted T & S B-0290 with B-199-2-F-12 aerator (1.20 gpm) Fisher 5412 Chicago Faucet

d. Pot Filler, Double joint T & S B581 Chicago Faucet 514 Fisher 4930

e. Mixing faucet valve T & S B512 Chicago Faucet 525 Fisher 2805

f. Vacuum Breaker - ¾" T & S B-457, B-458 Watts Arrowhead Vacuum Breaker - ½" T & S B-455, B-456 Watts Arrowhead

g. Vacuum Breaker, Anti Siphon Watts 800 series T & S B963 Crane

h. Check Valves T & S Brass CVH Watts Crane T & S Brass CVV Watts Crane

i. Quick disconnect Assemblies Dormont Greitzer Connect It, Inc.

j. Drain Valve Assemblies

06/21/2019



CHG DSS-8000 Kason Fisher

2. Waste outlets with stainless steel twist handle, stainless steel drain valve body, a

self centering face flange, a flat stainless steel "snap-in" strainer plate and a chrome plated tailpiece. Overflow fittings will not be required unless specifically stated in the item specifications.

3. Control valves required for operation, located convenient to the operator.

Extension stems with supports shall be chrome plated. Equip steam valves with heat resistant red handles.

4. Chrome plated vacuum breakers on threaded faucets, hose stations and on fixtures

where the water inlets are placed below the water level.

5. Backflow preventers on pre-rinse units.

6. Anti-siphon pressure type vacuum breakers on hose reels.

7. Angle flange or deck and wall flange where vacuum breakers extend through equipment.

8. Special valves, regulators, strainers, pressure reducing valves, control valves,

thermometers, pressure gauges, keyed water flow restrictors and accessories required by code or necessary for the operation of equipment.

9. Quick disconnect with couplers and flexible double wall stainless steel hose with

built in restraining device and double shut-off at ends. Disconnect hoses for steam lines to be insulated. Assemblies to be color coded: Yellow for gas, green for steam, red for hot water and blue for cold water. Provide equipment chain retainer.

2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK INCLUDED IN CONTRACT

A. Work provided by this section shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Plugs matching the receptacles specified in the Electrical Section of specifications. Plugs to be manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton, or GE.

2. Grounded receptacles mounted in type "IB" enclosures equipped with stainless

steel faceplates and boxes where receptacles are exposed. Do not furnish twist lock unless specified. Receptacles mounted on tables and counters shall be equipped with ground fault interrupts (GFI).

3. Controls, thermostats, starters, motor control switches, switches and contactors.

Furnish remote mounted components to Division 26 for mounting.

4. Magnetic starters with NEMA enclosure for motors sized as required by codes.

06/21/2019



5. Type "ND" single throw heavy duty industrial, quick make - quick break disconnect switch with interlocked cover control where called for in the item specifications.

6. NEMA type 4 enclosures for controls, disconnects, magnetic starters and other

components which are located in wet or damp areas.

7. Bolted type circuit breaker where called for in the item specifications. Verify with Architect as to the manufacturer.

8. Three wire or four wire type "SO" neoprene cord and plug sets with one leg

grounded to equipment.

9. Anaconda Sealtite Type "EF", Electri-Flex, or Cantex conduit and waterproof boxes. Unprotected flexible metal conduit will not be accepted.

10. Conduit and conductors in conduit raceway for fabricated equipment.

11. Low voltage control circuits on equipment operating on voltages over 120 volts.

12. Totally enclosed, fan cooled motors where exposed to damp and wet areas.

13. Motors less than ½ horsepower, for solenoid valves and lighting shall be 120 volt,

single phase. Unless otherwise noted motors greater than ½ horsepower shall be three phase. Motors shall have ball and thrust type bearings, totally enclosed, 55º rise above 40º ambient continuous duty. Motors shall have low starting torque, current characteristics, with NEMA frames.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. Hardware other than stainless steel shall be heavy duty chrome plated brass, with concealed fasteners.

B. Provide master keyed locks. Refrigeration equipment locks shall be keyed alike and

fabricated equipment door and drawer locks shall be keyed alike. 2.04 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT

A. Material shall be new prime quality, full gauge thickness, of composition indicated by names or abbreviations stated in item specifications.

B. Stainless Steel shall be type 302 or type 304, with a No. 4 finish, as designated by the

American Iron and Steel Institute and shall be austenitic.

C. Galvanized steel angles, bars, channels, piping, tubing, and sheets shall be uniformly ductile in quality and free from hard spots, runs, blisters, spelter, checks and other surface defects. Material shall be mild steel, galvanized by the hot dip process, unless otherwise specified.

D. Welds shall be of same basic composition as sheets or parts welded. Joints shall be fully

welded. Pits, cracks, discolorations, distortion and depressions will not be acceptable.

06/21/2019



Grind smooth and polish welded joints, flush with the adjoining material and neatly finish to harmonize therewith. Soldered, lapped, fillet corners and bolted joints will not be acceptable in place of welded seamless construction.

E. Burrs, projections and fins are not acceptable on sheared edges. Neatly grind miters and

bullnosed corners to a uniform condition.

F. Bolts, screws and rivets are not acceptable on exposed surfaces of equipment. Where bolts or studs are welded to the underside of stainless steel surfaces, the reverse side of the weld shall be neatly finished to blend in with the adjacent surface. Depressions at these points will not be acceptable. Cap bolt threads and studs with a suitable lock washer and chromium plated brass acorn nut. Bolts used to fasten trim shall be stainless steel.

G. Fabricate metal table tops, sinks and drainboards of 14 gauge stainless steel. Sound deaden

underside of tops, drainboards, and sinks with an NSF approved sound deadening product. Provide tacky tape between all support channel and metal table tops. Exposed table top corners shall be radiused 1¾".

H. Edges, corners, rims and backsplash shall be die formed of same sheet as top. Cove

intersection of tops at backsplash and rims on a ¾" radius. Rim and backsplash tops shall be level.

I. Backsplash shall be flanged back a minimum of 2" at 45º and down 1" at 45º. Enclose ends

and rear of exposed backsplash.

J. Provide raised die formed ferrule around punch or drilled holes in table tops and shelves.

K. Sink back, bottom and front shall be formed of one continuous sheet with the ends welded into place. Construct bottom by creasing or forming the metal downward from each wall a minimum of one degree distinct slope toward the waste receptacle which shall be recessed a minimum of ⅜" below the adjoining surfaces. Provide double wall partition between each pair of sink compartments with rounded top edge. Provide sinks having two or more compartments with full length, full height flush stainless steel front panel to conceal joint between sinks. Turn back panel at sides and bottom and weld to sink bowl. Cove sink corners on a ¾" radius.

L. Slope drainboards, dishtable tops and beverage stand tops, urn drainers and troughs with an

integral pitch towards the drain water receptor to ensure positive drainage and to eliminate water pockets.

M. Reinforce tops with 12 gauge channels, one channel provided on tops up to 36" wide and

two channels on tops over 36" wide. Provide open base tables with channel runner at each pair of legs. Exposed channels shall be stainless steel. Attach top to the channel reinforcements with studs welded to the underside of top. Seal intersection of channel edge and underside of top with silicone.

N. Cabinet type enclosures shall be 16 gauge stainless steel. Round exposed vertical corners

on a ¾" radius die. Flange top and bottom off at 2" right angles to the body and weld in corner gusset plates. The walls of cabinet shall be a fully welded seamless assembly with channels and box sections corners. A STRUCTURAL ANGLE FRAMEWORK SUPPORTING THE ENCLOSURE IS NOT ACCEPTABLE. Provide individual

06/21/2019



compartments separated by a partition, enclosing sinks, machinery and drawers from the balance of the base cabinet. Weld partition to the cabinet body.

O. Doors shall be flush mounted double pan construction, with ½" thick semi-rigid fiberglass

board between the two panels. Door face shall be 16 gauge steel and back face shall be 20 gauge stainless steel. Internally reinforce doors 24" wide and greater with a 4" wide channel to prevent warpage. Tack weld intersection of front and rear door face around inside perimeter. Corners shall be fully welded. Space tack welds no greater than 6" apart. Grind smooth and polish all welds. Balance of space to be sealed with silicone.

P. Provide sliding doors with rubber button bumpers, die stamped stainless steel flush

mounted door pull, sheaves, nylon rollers with stainless steel ball bearings, overhead aluminum door track and a bronze or stainless steel door guide bar attached to the bottom of cabinet.

Q. Provide lockable hinged doors with rubber button bumpers, stainless steel lift off hinge, die

stamped stainless steel flush mounted door pull and a Component Hardware Model M27-2490, FMP, or Kason catch. Provide locks on all doors housing machinery and power panels.

R. Drawer assembly to be flush mounted double pan construction the same as described for

doors. Provide two (2) rubber button bumpers, one on each side of drawer face, drawer insert, self closing drawer slides, die stamped stainless steel flush mounted door pull and a cylinder lock. Provide 20" × 20" × 5" deep Component Hardware Model S80-2020, FMP, or Kason drawer insert, set loosely in a perimeter supporting channel frame with drawer face welded to the frame. Provide Component Hardware model S-52, FMP, or Kason ball bearing roller drawer slides with adjustable stops at the fully opened position mounted to the channel frame. Enclosed drawers on open base table in an 18 gauge stainless steel enclosure.

S. Fabricate shelves of 16 gauge stainless steel with formed edges, reinforced with channels,

the same as specified for tops.

T. Construct stationary shelves on open base tables formed with edge set on tangent point of leg and fully welded to leg.

U. Provide solid stationary shelves in enclosed base cabinets with back and ends turned up 2"

and coved on a ¼" minimum radius. Tack weld turn up to cabinet body and calk joint with silicone. Provide ¾" diameter perforations spaced on 4" center on shelves in heated base cabinets.

V. Construct pipe slots through undershelves with turned up edge on four sides. Provide

cabinets with an inner duct to conceal vertical piping.

W. Tubular leg assemblies shall consist of 1⅝" diameter 16 gauge stainless steel tubular legs and 1" diameter 16 gauge stainless steel crossrails. Fit top of legs into fully enclosed stainless steel sockets. Continuously weld sockets to reinforcing channel on underside of table tops, or to the reinforced stainless steel corner pads under sink corners. Bottom of pipe legs to be finished off smoothly and overlap the foot or caster stem. Crossrails shall be mitered and fully welded to each leg.

06/21/2019



X. Provide NSF labeled casters. Medium and heavy duty casters of 4", 5", and 6" diameter shall have a minimum capacity of 200 lbs. with double ball bearing raceway and non-marking neoprene soft tread ball bearing wheels with drilled axle and grease fittings. Casters shall be Component Hardware Group, Darnell, or Jarvis.

Y. Provide fully enclosed bullet shaped stainless steel feet with a slightly rounded foot at

bottom and an extra long threaded stem at the top.

2.05 FINISHES

A. Polish exposed stainless steel to a No. 4 commercial mill finish. Where unexposed, polish to a No. 2B finish. Satin finish exposed surfaces.

B. Paint and coatings shall be durable, non-toxic, non-dusting, non-flaking and mildew

resistant, complying with NSF standards and governing regulations. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Clean metal prior to painting and paint with a rust inhibiting primer. Finish with two (2)

coats of enamel in color selection determined by the Architect. Do not paint galvanized shelving.

2.06 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS

A. Provide refrigeration systems complete with components required for operation, designed for direct expansion, employing thermostatic expansion valves and pressure switches. Refrigeration systems must meet all required code criteria noted in OBC Mechanical Code Section 11, and/or all state and local codes as required.

B. Rate compressors on the American Society of Refrigeration Engineers Standards, based on

a maximum operating time of 16 hours per day on 100º F days. Mount compressor, condenser, motor, and auxiliary equipment on a single rigid base. Automatically control each unit by a suction pressure switch and a high pressure cut-off. Provide relief lines required by the codes, capped with screen vent fittings.

C. Provide the following components:

1. Sporlan, Ansul, or Cooper liquid line dryer.

2. Suction line accumulators on air cooled condensers which are located remote and

outside the building.

3. Room temperature thermostats and solenoid valves.

4. Strainers ahead of all valves.

5. Type "L" copper refrigerant piping.

6. Vibration eliminators and flexible tubing in suction and liquid lines.

7. Wrought copper recessed solder fittings for refrigeration lines.

06/21/2019



8. Type "L" copper piping with cast brass or wrought copper water line piping.

9. Sta-Brite, Sil-Fos 15, or Stay-Silv 15 silver solder.

10. Drip gutters under uncovered pipes, valves, and fittings.

11. Pipe hangers spaced a maximum of 96" on center and adjusted to the drop required.

12. Packless shutoff valves with port area equal to pipe area.

13. Charging valves located at the compressor.

14. Sporlan, Alco or Detroit Lubricator Thermostatic expansion valves.

15. Liquid line solenoid valves with port area equal to pipe area.

16. Cover refrigerant lines and chilled water lines with ¾" minimum thickness

refrigerant pipe insulation with joints neatly cut and glued with adhesive. Exposed exterior insulation shall be UV protected or wrapped.

17. Pipe sleeves constructed of steel and molded vinyl large enough to permit covered

insulated pipes to pass through.

18. Oil traps located at base of vertical risers in suction lines and at outlet of evaporator. Depth of trap to be three times the suction pipe diameter with a minimum horizontal dimension.

19. Equalizing line from expansion valve on compressor side of expansion bulb.

Suction lines to be pitched from high point at coil to compressor. It may be necessary to rise to avoid pipes, ducts, etc. There shall be a trap of minimum dimensions at base of each vertical rise if over 48".

D. Design system for not over two lbs. loss between compressor and evaporator. Dehydrate

system and hold at 150 lbs. pressure for a period of twelve hours without loss of pressure.

E. Test the refrigeration system for a period of three days making required adjustments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Fit equipment accurately in space provided. Notify the Architect in writing of modifications required to receive equipment.

B. Verify electrical and mechanical services at job site prior to ordering equipment.

Information shown on drawings does not relieve the Contractor of this responsibility.

06/21/2019



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Assist in moving equipment so other trades can make connections and be on the job to level and adjust equipment as the last connection is made. During installation instruct the trades on hook up of the various items of equipment.

B. Equipment fit adjacent to walls, ceilings, floors and corners shall be tight. Allow selvage

for a perfect fit. 3.03 SEALING AND TRIMMING

A. Caulk joints with GE Silastic, Component Hardware, or Dow Corning 732 RTV sealant. Joints exceeding ⅜" in width shall be trimmed with a stainless steel channel and caulked with sealant.

3.04 START-UP AND TESTING

A. Start-up, test and inspect equipment after installation under operating conditions. If inspection or test shows defects, correct the defects and repeat inspection and test.

B. Equipment must be operable prior to the demonstration of equipment by the manufacturer.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust service equipment to be in perfect operating condition when turned over to the Owner at completion of work.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste material during progress of work and, at completion, leave the premises clean and the equipment washed down, polished and ready for use.

3.07 TOUCH-UP

A. Polish out scratches in stainless steel and touch up scratches on painted surfaces. 3.08 DEMONSTRATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Schedule the equipment manufacturer’s representatives to appear and teach the Owner’s Staff on the correct operation, maintenance, and safety features of all the equipment.

B. After instruction, prepare a letter stating that equipment was demonstrated, and personally

checked by the manufacturer's representative, and found to be operating properly. Acceptance of the installation will not be contemplated until the letter, signed by the Owner, is received.

C. A representative of the supplier of the kitchen equipment must be present in the kitchen

during the demonstration by the appropriate equipment manufacturer. 3.09 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

06/21/2019



A. The Owner will have first salvage claim to equipment items not scheduled for reuse.

Salvaged items shall be complete with valves, accessories and controls.

B. Remove from the site equipment not scheduled for reuse or claimed by the Owner.

C. Protect from damage and theft equipment scheduled for reuse. Identify by Item Number and tag loose valves, controls and accessories and store with equipment.

D. Move the equipment from existing facility to storage and from storage to new facility.

Verify with Owner as to date when the equipment can be removed from the existing facility.

E. Examine existing equipment items scheduled for reuse at the site prior to preparing

drawings. Drawings shall contain rough-in information for the equipment.

F. Notify the Architect of parts or service required for existing equipment scheduled for reuse. Unauthorized service and parts shall be paid by the Contractor. Authorized service and parts will be paid by the Owner.

G. Clean interior and exterior of equipment items scheduled for reuse. Ranges, ovens, and

fryers shall be thoroughly cleaned using a commercial degreasing agent steam. Fabricated tables shall be thoroughly cleaned, and all galvanized surfaces shall be sanded and repainted using CHG M92-1012 chrome aluminum, fast drying, lead free, spray enamel. Installation requirements shall be the same as specified for the new equipment.

H. Installation requirements shall be the same as specified for the new equipment.

3.10 INSPECTION AND PUNCH LIST

A. When it has been concluded that work is installed, operating and substantially complete, prepare a "punch list" of items yet to be completed and forward a copy to the Architect and the Consultant.

B. The Architect will request the Consultant to inspect the equipment after receipt of the

punch list. If inspection reveals that the installation is not substantially complete or the punch list is not of a minor nature, and another inspection is required, then a Certificate of Substantial Completion will not be issued.

C. Reimburse the Consultant for subsequent inspections (including long distance telephone

calls) and time of the Consultant. If the costs have not been paid before final payment, the costs will be deducted from the Contractor's final payment.

D. Immediately upon completion of the Consultant's inspection, correct punch list items.

When items have been corrected, the Contractor shall notify the Architect in writing that the installation is ready for inspection.

3.11 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE / SPECIFICATIONS

06/21/2019



The following equipment schedule/specifications refers to various items of food service equipment shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contract Drawings and notes form a part of these specifications and shall be as binding as if written herein. ITEM NO. 1 - SHELF UNIT, FIXED QUANTITY – FIVE MFG. AND MODEL: METROMAXi Shelf unit shall be constructed of reinforced polymers with continuous glass fibers and thermoset resin composite. Exterior surfaces shall be hi-impact thermoplastic resin. Shelves shall be adjustable along the height of the posts. Shelf mats shall be open grid style and totally removable with out the use of tools. Posts shall be mounted on a leveling foot. Each unit shall consist of four (4) 86" posts and five (5) shelves. ITEM NO. 2 - COOKING VENTILATION SYSTEM QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: MASTER AIR EH ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 AND 208-3 Provide ventilation system meeting all the requirements of NFPA 96, U.L., bear the NSF No. 908 seal and equipped with exhaust hood, roof top exhaust fan unit, roof top make up air supply unit, furnace, fire control system, connecting ductwork, roof curbs, start-up, balance, and service. The furnishing and installation of the complete ventilation package shall be the responsibility of the hood manufacturer. Per International Mechanical Code (IMC 507.2.1.1), a control system shall be provided to start the exhaust system when cooking appliances are turned on. This shall be accomplished with the use of temperature sensors mounted in the exhaust hood collars. The temperature sensors shall be connected to a temperature controller with a digital display. The temperature controller shall be provided with a locking adjustable set point, and a digital readout, indicating duct temperature. When cooking appliances are turned on, the temperature sensors shall read the duct temperature increase and signal a relay. The relay shall close the motor starter coil circuits and actuate the fans. A stop button shall be used to turn the system off. Division 26 provide wiring from the temperature controller relay to the motor starter coil terminals. Provide exhaust hood with all hanging devices and support steel as required to complete the installation and hang the hood. Grease filter frame to be stainless steel and equipped with a built in pitch to drain to a

06/21/2019



stainless steel removable catch pan. Duct collars with fusible link actuated fire dampers shall be provided if required by U.L. listing requirements and/or local code requirements. Hood interior shall be constructed of stainless steel. Exterior face of hood shall be stainless steel. Above body of canopy provide a bulkhead to enclose the area from the top of hood to the finished ceiling. Bulkhead shall be constructed of same material as the exterior finish of the hood body. Hood shall be held 6" off the face of the building wall to allow utilities to be dropped from above behind the canopy. Provide a stainless steel closure at the rear and ends to enclose space after final hook up of all utilities. Grease extractors to be the baffle type, UL listed and constructed of stainless steel. Provide stainless steel blank off panels as required. Ceiling discharge make up air plenum to be provided at ceiling along the full length of the hood fronts. Plenum to include perforated air baffles and adjustable louvers to provide for even air distribution. Plenums to be constructed of steel with off white finish. Provide Component Hardware Flame Gard® L82-1040-22 light fixtures. Fixtures shall extend the full length of hood and equipped with rapid start ballasts. Fixtures shall be two (2) tube vapor proof fixtures completely sealed and gasketed, equipped with fluorescent tubes and glass shields. Wire fixtures to a common junction box and switch. Wiring for fixtures to be concealed in a wire chase. Chase to extend the full length of hood on all sides and equipped with removable stainless steel covers on outside of hood body. Fixture to provide approximately 90 foot candles of light on the cooking surface. Provide stainless steel wireway with removable wireway cover hood. Wireway shall contain the control switches for the hood lights and fans. Provide engraved nameplates for each switch. Switches shall be oil tight, equipped with indicator lights and factory wired to a junction box on top of the hood. Provide upblast roof mounted exhaust fan with disconnect switch, bird screen and the necessary controls required for operation. Supply fan to be equipped with enameled exterior body, blower with sealed bearings, adjustable drive sheave and motor base plate, open drip proof motor, factory wired disconnect switch, intake shroud with washable aluminum filters. Combination volume/fire damper to be mounted in unit make up air outlet. Damper to be motorized and interwired with kitchen hood fire protection system micro switch. Damper to close when unit is turned off to prevent outside air infiltrating into building. Damper will close shutting off make up air into the kitchen during normal operation if actuated by fire system micro switch or dampers fusible linkage. Provide unit with extended air intake shroud with mesh filter if required by codes. Provide model DFPN direct gas-fired make up air furnace installed as an integral part of the fan system. Furnace shall be factory assembled, tested and adjusted for operation conditions as shown on the plans. Cabinet enclosing the furnace shall be constructed of 18 gauge steel and painted with enamel. Cabinet to be provided with a lift out door with stainless steel handle. Outside air shroud to fit without modification on the intake end of gas furnace cabinet. Air pressure drop through furnace shall be adjustable with pre-drilled baffle plates to maintain pressure drop between 0.4" and 0.55" water column. Provide furnace with spark ignition system, Maxitrol electronic control system, gas pressure regulators and all controls

06/21/2019



and accessories required for proper operation. Provide a temperature sensing device in the make-up air plenum. The furnishing and installation of ducts shall be the responsibility of the hood manufacturer. Exhaust ducts to be constructed of 16 gauge black iron steel with continuous liquid tight external welds. Provide cleanouts as required. Supply duct to be constructed of steel in the gauge as required by ASHRAE. Make up air ducts shall be per SMACNA low pressure standards and internally insulated. Supplier of ductwork to provide two-hour rated exhaust duct wrap. Wrap to be dual layer uncompressed insulation banded to the duct with stainless steel banding strips. The duct wrap system to be installed in strict accordance with the ASTM E 2336. Furnish curbs with roof top units. Curb shall be metal clad insulated double wall with welded corners, a continuous nailer, and compatible with the roof. Fan system housing and curb assemblies shall be painted with enamel in color as selected by the Architect. Factory authorized agency to start-up, balance system, and perform a capture and containment test. Test to be verified by simulated cooking utilizing smoke candles, smoke puffers, or other approved means. Submit balance report and test results, and provide one (1) year free service with two (2) on-site inspections. The following lists the responsibility of work: Roof curbs: Section 11 40 00 Cutting of roof deck: Section 05 00 00 Perimeter steel around deck opening: Section 05 00 00 Flashing of roof curb: Section 07 00 00 Ducts and hangers: Section 11 40 00 Wiring of electrical components: Section 26 Drain line and water supply: Section 22 Wall louver for intake air: Section 05 00 00 ITEM NO. 2-B - FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: ANSUL R-102 ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Fire control system shall be designed and installed to conform with the latest editions of the National Fire Protection Association Standards, Underwriters Laboratories UL-300 standard and the local and state authorities having jurisdiction. System shall be approved by the State Fire Marshal and/or State Rating Bureau.

06/21/2019



Fire extinguishing nozzles shall be provided in all ducts, plenum chambers and in or above all surfaces of equipment which poses a potential fire hazard. System shall be installed complete with filled and chemical cylinders, chemical piping, gauges, mounting brackets, trip mechanism, nozzles, fusible link housings, special fittings, manual and integral release, stainless steel cable, cornering boxes, and fusible links. Chemical tanks shall be activated by a remote manually operated pull station located near the exit and working in conjunction with the fusible links located within the hood. Centerline of pull station box to be mounted 48” above finished floor. All piping and conduit shall be concealed where possible. All exposed piping, fittings and conduit shall be encased in a chrome plated sleeve or the piping and fittings shall be individually chromed. All piping shall be installed in an absolute vertical and horizontal plain. All changes in direction of piping must be made by a Venturi or a 90 degree elbow. Provide a micro switch at the chemical tank location with contacts "open" under fire condition. Division 26 to wire from the micro switch to the following: to the holding coil of hood exhaust fan to turn fan on in the event of a fire. to the building fire alarm panel alarm circuit. to the motorized fire damper in the supply air fan system. to the electrically operated automatic gas shut off valve and reset, to fuel and power shut down devices. An automatic gas shut off valve to be provided with this system and valve shall be installed in the gas line by Division 22. Division 26 provide U.L. listed industrial type power contactors, shunt trips with 120 volt holding coils with contact ratings matching the cooking equipment to be shut down in the event of a fire. K.E.C. to submit fire protection information with the ventilation hood submittals. Information to include the following:

• Identify the location of the manual fire pull station in a scaled floor plan. The location of the suppression tanks to be indicated in the submittal as required.

• Identify each piece of existing equipment located under the new kitchen hood. Identify if equipment is gas or electric.

• Submit a drawing complete with fire suppression piping layout locating the drops. Install the fire control system chemical tanks and components in an enclosed cabinet mounted on one end of the range hood. Cabinet shall be constructed of 16 gauge. steel matching the exterior fascia of the hood. Front of cabinet to be equipped with a hinged double panel door with latches and pull. ITEM NO. 3 - CONVECTION OVEN QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: SOUTH BEND GB 15SC

06/21/2019



ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Provide with stainless steel french type lockable hinged doors, gas pressure regulator, manual gas shut-off, gas burners assembly, automatic thermal overload protection, "on-off" switch, blower motor with switch, indicator lights, door interlock switch, draft diverter, interior compartment lights with switch, electronic ignition system, solid state temperature control system with control knob temperature selectors, fan delay and pulse fan, electric buzzer working in conjunction with a timer, T&S HG-4-S Safe-T-Link™ series gas connector kit with flexible gas line, cord and plug set, glass vision panels in doors, and a two speed fan motor. Interior finish shall be porcelain steel and equipped with five (5) pan racks for each compartment. Exterior finish shall be manufacturers standard finish. Provide an open base stand equipped with pan rack guides. Mount on 5" diameter casters, two equipped with brakes. Provide a three (3) year parts and labor warranty. ITEM NO. 4 - REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR - EXISTING QUANTITY - ONE Locate unit as shown on plan. ITEM NO. 5 - REACH-IN FREEZER QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: TRUE T49F-HC ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Provide unit with self-contained refrigeration system with compressor, thermometer, automatic condensate evaporator, and cord and plug set. Doors shall be hinged as indicated on the drawings and equipped with stainless steel hinges, magnetic gasket, pull handle and cylinder lock and two keys. Doors shall be full-size and equipped with solid front. Controls, thermometers, temperature gauges, on-off switches and indicator lights shall be mounted on the "kitchen side" of the cabinet. Exterior shall be stainless steel where exposed. Interior of unit shall be fitted with universal angle slides in upper portion of compartments and four (4) standard removable shelves in each of the lower compartments. Mount on 5" diameter casters equipped with top mounting plate and brakes on two casters.

06/21/2019



ITEM NO. 6 - MOBILE WORK TABLE QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: CONOVER CUSTOM STAINLESS Top shall be the size and shape as shown on the drawings, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel and reinforced on the underside with 12 gauge steel channels. Sound deaden the underside and paint with two coats of aluminum paint. Tool drawer shall be located below top where shown. Drawer shall be 20" × 20" × 5" deep and enclosed in a fully enclosed 18 gauge stainless steel housing. Refer to detailed drawings of drawer housing. Provide a 21" × 21" × ½" thick cutting board with rounded corners, sanded edges and finger hole pull. Cutting board shall be supported on stainless steel slides located directly below the drawer housing. Stationary undershelf shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel. Shelf shall be fully welded to legs with weld ground and polished to blend with the adjacent surfaces. Crossrails shall be 1" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing. Crossrails shall be fully welded to legs and ground and polished to blend with adjacent surfaces. Omit the crossrails where shown to allow space for carts. Legs shall be constructed of 1⅝" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing equipped with stainless steel gussets and 5" diameter casters, two equipped with toe brakes. ITEM NO. 7 - VEGETABLE PREP TABLE QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: CONOVER CUSTOM STAINLESS Top shall be the size and shape as shown on the drawings, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel and reinforced on the underside with 12 gauge stainless steel channels. Sound deaden the underside. Openings in the top shall be die stamped and completely finished. Field joints shall be welded, ground and polished smooth. Backsplash to be provided along wall sides and sealed thereto with silicone. Sink compartments shall be the size and shape as shown, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel and made as an integral part of the top. Crease bottom of sink bowl and pitch to the drain. Provide a T & S Brass model B-0231-CR faucet assembly with B-199-2-F-12 aerator, and a CHG DSS-8000 lever waste assembly or T&S Brass model B-3990-3X modular push-pull waste valve. Provide a T & S Brass model B-5125-12-BJ, Fisher, or Chicago pre-rinse assembly equipped with an 8” wall mount workboard faucet, polished chrome plated brass body and escutcheon, add-on faucet with compression cartridge with spring check and lever handle, 12” swing nozzle with stream regulator outlet, 18” riser, 44” flexible stainless steel hose with heat resistant handle, 1.07 GPM spray valve, compression cartridges with spring checks, lever handles, in-line vacuum breaker, quick-disconnect assembly, EB-0107 spray valve, B-0108 Jet Spray valve, ½" NPT male inlets, 6” adjustable wall bracket, spray valve holder, and an overhead spring. Unit shall be certified to ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1, NSF 61-Section 9 & NSF 372, and EPAct 2005 compliant. Stationary undershelf shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel. Shelf shall be fully welded to legs with weld ground and polished to blend with the adjacent surfaces.

06/21/2019



Crossrails shall be 1" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing. Crossrails shall be fully welded to legs and ground and polished to blend with adjacent surfaces. Omit the crossrails where shown to allow space for carts. Legs shall be constructed of 1⅝" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing equipped with stainless steel gussets and stainless steel adjustable bullet type feet. ITEM NO. 8 - HAND SINK - EXISTING QUANTITY - ONE Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. ITEM NO. 9 - UTENSIL WASHING SINK QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: CONOVER CUSTOM STAINLESS Top shall be the size and shape as shown on the drawings, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel and reinforced on the underside with 12 gauge stainless steel channels. Sound deaden the underside of top. Openings in the top shall be die stamped and completely finished. Field joints shall be welded, ground and polished smooth. Backsplash to be provided along wall sides and sealed thereto. Sink compartments shall be the size and shape as shown, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel and made as an integral part of the top. Crease bottom of sink bowl and pitch to the drain. Provide a Provide a T & S Brass model B-2278-01, Fisher, or Chicago pre-rinse assembly equipped with a B-0107C spray valve with locking ring and heatproof handle, check valves, in-line vacuum breaker, stainless steel flexible hose, and a wall bracket. Pre-rinse assembly to be EPAct 2005 compliant and shall have a flow rate of not more than 1.6 gallons per minute. Above center partitions of sink bowls and mounted to backsplash, provide T & S Brass model B-0290, Fisher, or Chicago fast flow faucets. Faucet to be equipped with street EL inlets and locknuts. Provide bottom of soak and wash sink bowls with a CHG DSS-8000 lever waste assembly or T&S Brass model B-3990-3X modular push-pull waste valve. Waste collector drop in unit shall be made as an integral part of the top. Water supplying the inlets shall be controlled thru the waste collector control panel. All welds shall be ground and polished to a smooth finish. Below table top provide a stainless steel bracket for mounting the waste collector control panel. Bracket shall be mounted so the front face of the control panel will not extend out beyond the face of the table. Stationary undershelf shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel. Shelf shall be fully welded to legs with weld ground and polished to blend with the adjacent surfaces. Crossrails shall be 1" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing. Crossrails shall be fully welded to legs and ground and polished to blend with adjacent surfaces. Omit the crossrails where shown.

06/21/2019



Legs shall be constructed of 1⅝" diameter × 16 gauge stainless steel tubing equipped with stainless steel gussets and stainless steel adjustable bullet type feet. Leg gussets shall be fully welded to the top reinforcing channels. ITEM NO. 10 - DISHWASHER, UNDERCOUNTER QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: HOBART LXeH ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120/208V1 Dishwasher shall be an undercounter type machine equipped with an automatic timer, C.P. vacuum breakers, water pressure reducing valves set at 20 PSIG., temperature/pressure gauges, line strainers, SS front enclosure panel, and adjustable legs. Provide standard control panel with thermal overload protection devices for motors and thermostatic temperature control with low water cut-off for heat. The installation of the pressure reducing and pressure regulating valves and vacuum breakers furnished with the machine shall be the responsibility of Division 22. Tank shall be heated by an electric heating immersion heating element, controlled by an "on-off" switch and thermostat with low water protection. Provide unit with the following: Stainless steel side panels. Stainless steel top. Two (2) Metro P41M combination racks. Two (2) Metro G9 glass racks. Two (2) Metro G6 glass racks. Two (2) Metro P2MO all purpose racks. ITEM NO. 11 - WALL CABINET QUANTITY – TWO SETS MFG. AND MODEL: CONOVER CUSTOM FABRICATOR Wall cabinets shall be the size and shape as shown on the drawings and mounted on wall in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Top of wall cabinet shall be mounted 80" above the finished floor. Exterior finish shall be stainless steel. Equip cabinets with door pulls, door locks, and closure trim matching the exterior finish of cabinets. Provide a sloping dust cover matching the exterior finish of the cabinets extending the full length of the cabinets and fillers. ITEM NO. 12 - MICRO WAVE OVEN - EXISTING QUANTITY - ONE Locate unit as shown on plan.

06/21/2019



ITEM NO. 13 – HEATED HOLDING CABINET - EXISTING QUANTITY - ONE Locate unit as shown on plan. ITEM NO. 14 - UTILITY CART, MOBILE QUANTITY - MFG. AND MODEL: LAKESIDE 722 Provide cart with two solid stainless steel shelves, push handle, revolving donut type bumpers, and casters. ITEM NO. 15 - HOT / COLD FOOD COUNTER, MOBILE – EXISTING UNIT BY OWNER QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: DELFIELD SH-3C-74-NU ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120/208-1 Top shall be the size and shape as shown on the drawing, constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel with mirror finished rims. Provide one (1) 8" wide stainless steel shelf flush with counter top mounted on stainless steel fold down brackets. Provide unit with 3 standard wattage hot food wells, five (5) Vollrath model 90022 2.5" deep steam table pans with model 94100 slotted covers, cord and plug set. Provide unit with a mechanically refrigerated cold pan (meeting requirements of NSF 7) equipped with self-contained refrigeration system complete with on-off switch and drain, Drains shall be manifolded and extended into an accessible compartment inside the cabinet base. End of drain line shall be fitted with a valve. Inside of compartment provide a Rubbermaid plastic waste water container. Enclose the compartment with a stainless steel door equipped with paddle latch and lift off hinges. Top shall be mounted on a high pressure plastic laminate base enclosure in color/pattern as selected by the Architect. Enclosure shall be equipped with a full length stainless steel bottom shelf. Mount unit on 5" diameter casters two equipped with brakes. Above counter top where shown provide a "Lift and Lock" style single sided buffet style food protector with uprights adjustable in the vertical dimension, glass end enclosures, stainless steel top shelf and hinged glass breath guards. Below the top shelf of the food protector provide an undershelf infra-red food warmer with display lights stainless steel housing and an "on-off" switch.

06/21/2019



ITEM NO. 16 - MILK COOLER, MOBILE - EXISTING QUANTITY - ONE ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Locate unit as shown on plan. ITEM NO. 17 - ICE MAKER W/ BIN – EXISTING UNIT BY OWNER QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: SCOTSMAN ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Provide ice maker with an automatic ice maker shut down device to cut off production when the bin is full. Provide vacuum breaker on incoming water line to the ice maker. Refrigeration system shall be self-contained and air-cooled. Ice maker shall be complete with an ice storage bin the same finish as the ice maker unit. Provide unit with the following components: automatic cleaning system, Dormont model IMIKFS-01D Ice Maker Installation Kit, water filter system with spun polypropylene pre-filtration, spun polypropylene post filter, with food grade phosphate scale inhibitor crystals and a food grade activated carbon filter. and a cord and plug set as required. Exterior finish of unit shall be manufacturers standard. Mount unit on 6" high adjustable legs. ITEM NO. 18 - SIX BURNER RANGE QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: SOUTH BEND 4361D Provide gas pressure regulator, gas shut-off valve, six (6) open burners, electronic spark ignition for all burners, T&S HG-4-S Safe-T-Link™ series gas connector kit with flexible gas line, rear gas connection, stainless steel single high shelf, and a standard oven base with 100% safety pilot and Piezo ignition. Exterior finish shall be the manufacturers standard. Mount unit on casters equipped with top mounting plate. ITEM NO. 19 – SPARE NUMBER

06/21/2019



ITEM NO. 20 – WASTE COLLECTOR QUANTITY - ONE MFG. AND MODEL: SALVAJOR S914 ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 208-3 Provide collector and drop into utensil washing sink with mounting assembly kit, and a control assembly. Install the collector in the countertop in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The furnishing and installation of all piping and wiring and the installation of all related components furnished with the disposer shall be the responsibility of Divisions 22 and 26. Refer to disposer piping diagram for method of installation. Control assembly shall consist of a NEMA 4 stainless steel watertight control box, post water flush with adjustable timer set for 30 seconds, water tight start-stop buttons, solenoid valves, three-year warranty, disposer load sensor, and a line disconnect switch interlocked with cover. ITEM NO. 21 - MOP SINK QUANTITY - ONE Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Unit to be furnished and installed by Division 22. ITEM NO. 22 - CLOTHES WASHER QUANTITY - ONE ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 120-1 Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Unit to be furnished and installed by Owner. ITEM NO. 23 - CLOTHES DRYER QUANTITY - ONE ELEC. REQ'M'TS: 208-1 Not in Kitchen Equipment Contract. Unit to be furnished and installed by Owner. END OF SECTION 11 40 00

06/21/2019


METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1

SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Filled-system thermometers. 3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 4. Thermowells. 5. Dial-type pressure gages. 6. Gage attachments. 7. Test plugs. 8. Test-plug kits.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ashcroft Inc. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. Marsh Bellofram. 4. Miljoco Corporation. 5. Nanmac Corporation. 6. Noshok. 7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

06/21/2019



8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. 9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company. 10. Trerice, H. O. Co. 11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 12. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 13. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA. 14. Winters Instruments - U.S.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Non reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F.

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle rigid, back and rigid, bottom, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass or plastic.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Ashcroft Inc. b. Marsh Bellofram. c. Miljoco Corporation. d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. e. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation. f. Trerice, H. O. Co. g. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 5-inch nominal diameter. 4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.

06/21/2019



5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F and deg C.

7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 8. Window: Glass or plastic 9. Ring: Stainless steel 10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in

horizontal plane, with locking device rigid, back and rigid, bottom; with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Trerice, Weiss

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size. 4. Case Form: Straight unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C 7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation. 9. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 10. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 11. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.4 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES . 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

06/21/2019



10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.5 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Trerice, Weiss

2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 6-inchnominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and

bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass or plastic. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.7 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Trerice, Weiss, Watts

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank. 4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

06/21/2019



3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct metal case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct-mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber

inserts.

B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct mounted, metal case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 4. Direct mounted, light-activated type. 5. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber

inserts.

C. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping:0 to 250 deg F.

C. Scale Range for Domestic Cooled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.

3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber

inserts.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct mounted, metal case. 2. Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber

inserts.

C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct mounted, metal case.

06/21/2019



2. Sealed, direct mounted, plastic case. 3. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber

inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.


06/21/2019


GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ball valves. 2. Check valves. 3. Combination balancing and shutoff valves. 4. Globe valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NPS: Nominal Pipe Size

D. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

E. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated, include: Body, seating and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections, arrangements; dimensions and required clearances. Submit pressure drop curves for no-slam check valves. Include a list indicating valve type and its piping system application. Include rated capacities; shipping and operating weights and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Contract Closeout Information:

1. Valve chart indicating valve identification number, valve type, service, manufacturer and model number, and location of valve.

2. Operating and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Grooved end valves shall be of the same manufacturer as adjoining couplings.

B. ASME Compliance:

06/21/2019



1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 4. ASME Boiler Code Specifications for Boiler Room valves.

C. ASTM Compliance:

1. ASTM B62 for 125 psi and 150 psi saturated steam rated valve pressure containing parts. 2. ASTM B61 for 200 psi and 300 psi valves with metallic seats.

D. Factory test all valve bodies, shells and seats per MSS requirements at a minimum.

E. Iron Body Valves

1. Pressure-Containing Parts: ASTM A126, Grade B. 2. Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions: ANSI B16.10. 3. Design, Workmanship, Materials, Testing: MSS SP-70, 71, 85.

F. Valve Stems: ASTM B371, Alloy C69400; ASTM B371, Alloy C65100H04 (rolled silicon brass); or other material equally resistant to dezincification.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

H. Pressure casting shall be free of impregnating materials, no welding of iron allowed.

I. Manufacturer’s name or trademark and working pressure stamped or cast into body.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooved ends, and weld ends. 3. Set gate and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

B. Ball, Check, and Globe Valves: 1. Milwaukee, Hammond, Crane, NIBCO, DeZurik, Watts, Tyco, Mueller or Victaulic.

C. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valves: 1. Armstrong, Bell & Gossett, Griswold, Taco, IMI Hydronic Engineering or Victaulic.

D. Check and Globe Valves: 1. Milwaukee, Hammond, Crane or Flowserve.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. Valves shall be rated for pressures and temperatures no less than 20% over that of the piping system in which they are installed. Account for piping system pressure tests when selecting component ratings.

B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

C. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

D. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

E. Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valves:

1. Install where shown on Drawings. Valves shall be designed and used only for balancing, not shutoff.

2. Provide a means for connecting to a portable differential pressure meter for readout. A portable pressure gauge, hoses and flow curves shall be provided in a portable test kit.

3. On sizes 2-1/2” and larger, valve size, capacity and operating pressure must comply with ASME Boiler Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

06/21/2019



4. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for upstream and downstream straight piping lengths.

5. Provide an additional “separate” shutoff valve upstream of combination valves for system/component shutoff.

2.3 BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. ANSI Class: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded or Soldered for copper piping. g. Seats: Reinforced PTFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Chrome plate ball, vented. j. Port: Full. k. Operator: Hand Lever.

2.4 CHECK VALVES

A. Bronze Swing Check Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. ANSI Class: 125 c. CWP Rating: 200 psig. d. Body Design: Horizontal flow. e. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. f. Ends: Threaded or Soldered for copper piping. g. Disc: Reinforced PTFE. h. Cap: Threaded.

2.5 COMBINATION BALANCING AND SHUTOFF VALVES

A. Calibrated Ball Type or Venturi Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valves:

1. Description:

a. CWP Rating: 125 psig. b. Body Material: Brass or Bronze (ASTM B 62) c. Ends: Flanged, Threaded or Soldered for copper piping. d. Seat Material: Double-seated Teflon.

06/21/2019



e. Ball Material: Stainless Steel. f. Stem Material: Brass/Bronze sealed with blow-out proof EPDM O-Ring. g. Operator: Lever with memory stop.

2.6 GLOBE VALVES

A. Bronze Globe Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. ANSI Class: 150 c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. d. Ends: Threaded or Flanged. e. Stem: Rising. f. Disc: 420 Stainless Steel. g. Seat Ring Material: 420 Stainless Steel. h. Bonnet: Union. i. Operator: Hand Wheel-Malleable iron.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

F. Examine grooved ends for form and cleanliness. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves at locations shown on the Drawings, per the Specifications and in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

06/21/2019



B. Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Unions for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved mechanical joint couplings (the couplings shall serve as disconnect points if required).

D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with handwheel and stem at or above center of pipe.

F. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

G. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

H. Install Combination Balancing and Shutoff Valves at each branch connection to return main.

I. Install Start/Stop flow valve for isolation at each branch connection to supply main.

J. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

K. All check valves should be installed in a location that has smooth and laminar flow conditions.

L. For swing type check valves, locate valve a minimum of 10 pipe diameters downstream of a reciprocating pump or other turbulence inducing device such as an elbow or tee. Locate elbows, reductions, etc. a minimum of 5 pipe diameters downstream of valve.

M. Valves installed in copper lines shall be provided with screwed or flanged adapters with a union installed downstream and within 12” of the valve.

N. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on the Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01, for installation requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

06/21/2019



3.5 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Shutoff: Ball Valves. 2. Prevent Backflow: Lift Check Valves or Bronze Swing Check Valves. 3. Regulate/Balance Flow: Calibrated Ball Type or Venturi Combination Balancing Shutoff

Valves.


06/21/2019


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Fastener systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.”


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittals:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

2. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

06/21/2019



a. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. b. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

B. Informational Submittals:

1. Welding certificates.

C. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. SMACNA.

D. Pipe Hanger Standards: Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) SP-58, SP-89, and SP-69, as referenced.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS


1. B-line Systems, Inc; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 4. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 7. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

06/21/2019



5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless steel.

C. Saddles

1. Material Galvanized Steel, 180-degree shape, each saddle marked with insulation O.D. Standard manufacturers gauge per insulated pipe size.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO International Corporation. 3. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig, ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig, or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

06/21/2019



B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel or stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

C. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

E. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

F. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

06/21/2019



G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

I. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

06/21/2019



C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 9.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications.

06/21/2019



F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

G. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with

steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

06/21/2019



21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are

considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

06/21/2019



13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

K. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

L. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

M. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.


06/21/2019


IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Stencils. 4. Valve tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each

identification material and device. 3. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the

proposed content for each label. 4. Valve numbering scheme.

B. Closeout Submittal:

1. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass: 0.032-inch, stainless steel: 0.025-inch, aluminum: 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

06/21/2019



B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.


C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to [partially cover] [cover full] circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping.

2.3 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Piping:

06/21/2019



1. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. 2. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel in colors complying with recommendations in

ASME A13.1 unless otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

B. Stencils for Access Panels and Door Labels, Equipment Labels, and Similar Operational Instructions:

1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

2. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass: 0.032-inch, stainless steel: 0.025-inch, aluminum: 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain, or beaded chain, or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

06/21/2019



C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background. 2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve or control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping

a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White.

2. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Safety green. b. Letter Color: White.

3. Fuel Gas Piping:

06/21/2019



a. Background Color: Yellow. b. Letter Color: Black.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: 1-1/2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Colors: Natural. 3. Letter Colors: Black.


06/21/2019


PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating plumbing piping systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

B. Protection: Do not permit mineral fiber or calcium silicate insulation to get wet. Mineral fiber or calcium silicate insulation that is or has been wet shall be removed from the project site.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

06/21/2019



1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

B. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

C. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

D. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. b. Approved equal.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied [ASJ] [ASJ-SSL]: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585. 8. Properties:

a. Maximum Operating Temperature: 900 deg F. b. Minimum Operating Temperature: -450 deg F. c. Maximum Thermal Conductivity at 200 deg F Mean Temperature: 0.40 Btu-in/hr-

ft2-deg F. d. Density: 7.2 pounds per cubic foot. e. Minimum Compressive Strength: 90 psi. f. Maximum Water Vapor Permeability: 0.00 perm-inches.

06/21/2019



2.2 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

2.3 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

06/21/2019



2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

1. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation.

2. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White.

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. All-Service Jacket (ASJ): White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.

2. All-Service Jacket – Self-Sealing Lap (ASJ-SSL): ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.

3. Foil-Scrim Kraft (FSK) Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. Maximum water vapor permeance 0.02 perms.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.

06/21/2019



B. Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED CLOTHS

A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.

2.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Adhesive as recommended by jacket material manufacturer.


a. Johns Manville; Ceel-Co or Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Color: White unless indicated otherwise. 3. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

D. Metal Jacket:

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

b. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

2. Stainless-Steel Jacket: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M.

a. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

b. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn.

E. Self-Adhesive Indoor or Outdoor Jacket: Multiple-ply laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation; consisting of aluminum, Tedlar, or

06/21/2019



laminate sheet with integral acrylic peel-and-stick adhesive with white, silver, or black facing as indicated.


a. 3M; VentureClad. b. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.

F. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

G. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

H. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers: 1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures: 1. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-

water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

06/21/2019



B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions.

B. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

C. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system.

D. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

E. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

F. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

G. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Mineral fiber or calcium silicate insulation that is or has been wet shall be removed from the job site.

I. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

K. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

06/21/2019



3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

L. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

M. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches on center.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches on center.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

N. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

O. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

P. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

Q. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

06/21/2019



2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in firestopping section.

D. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

firestopping section.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is more. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is more. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating

06/21/2019



cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is more.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

06/21/2019



B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral-wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped along length of roll with 2-inch-overlap seal. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as indicated. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

06/21/2019



3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 or Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 or Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:


B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 or Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:


2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities: Insulation shall be as described in Protective Shielding Guards article above.

3.9 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed: None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. None. 2. PVC, Color-Coded by System: 20 mils thick.


06/21/2019


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner’s representative no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner’s representative’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-PW."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

06/21/2019



B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:


a. Elkhart Products Corporation. b. NIBCO Inc. c. Viega.

2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.

2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company; member of the Phoenix Forge Group. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Jomar International. e. Matco-Norca. f. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.

06/21/2019



4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP. c. Matco-Norca. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: [300 psig at 225 deg F]. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

D. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

E. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

F. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

G. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

H. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

06/21/2019



I. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

J. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

K. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

L. Install piping free of sags and bends.

M. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

N. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

O. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

P. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

06/21/2019



E. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.

F. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.3 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.

3.4 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.


A. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

06/21/2019



3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

E. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.



1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

06/21/2019



b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

06/21/2019



5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

06/21/2019



3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings;

and soldered joints.

3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or

ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.


06/21/2019


DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Outlet boxes. 6. Wall hydrants. 7. Drain valves. 8. Water-hammer arresters. 9. Flexible connectors.



B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties.



A. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14

06/21/2019




A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products. b. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Standard: ASSE 1011. 4. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated

06/21/2019



C. Pressure Vacuum Breakers



a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. g. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Standard: ASSE 1020. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 6. Size: See DrawingsDesign Flow Rate: See Drawings 7. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: See Drawings 8. Pressure Loss at Design Flow Rate: See Drawings 9. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type, on inlet and outlet.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawingsor comparable product by one of the following:

a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Honeywell International Inc. e. Legend Valve. f. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. g. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Union, solderjoint. 7. Finish: Rough bronze.

B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers

06/21/2019



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

3. Standard: ASSE 1013. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Pressure Loss: 12 psigmaximum, through middle third of flow range. 6. Size: See Drawings 7. Design Flow Rate: See Drawings 8. Selected Unit Flow Range Limits: See Drawings 9. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; steel with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 10. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flangedfor NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 11. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-throughflow. 12. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends

on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

C. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig> maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet.

06/21/2019



D. Beverage-Dispensing-Equipment Backflow Preventers 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. c. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1022. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Stainless steel. 5. End Connections: Threaded.

E. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). f. Honeywell International Inc. g. Legend Valve. h. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. i. Mueller Co. Ltd.; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. j. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. k. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1024. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

F. Carbonated-Beverage-Dispenser, Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Lancer Corporation. c. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Standard: ASSE 1032. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Body: Stainless steel. 5. End Connections: Threaded.

2.5 BALANCING VALVES

A. Copper-Alloy Calibrated Balancing Valves:

06/21/2019




a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Flo Fab Inc. c. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett Div. d. NIBCO Inc. e. TAC. f. TACO Incorporated. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.

2. Type: Ball valve with two readout ports and memory-setting indicator. 3. Body: bronze. 4. Size: Same as connected piping, but not larger than NPS 2. 5. Accessories: Meter hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and carrying case.

B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO Inc. h. Red-White Valve Corp.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device.

2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Cash Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Honeywell International Inc. d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc. e. Leonard Valve Company.

06/21/2019



f. Powers; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. g. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled, water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

2.7 OUTLET BOXES

A. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. IPS Corporation. d. LSP Products Group, Inc. e. Oatey. f. Plastic Oddities. g. Symmons Industries, Inc. h. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. i. Whitehall Manufacturing; a div. of Acorn Engineering Company. j. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.

2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel, epoxy-painted-steel, or plastic box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Combination valved fitting or separate hot- and cold-water valved fittings

complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 on outlets.

5. Supply Shutoff Fittings: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valves and NPS 1/2 copper, water tubing.

6. Drain: NPS 2 standpipe and P-trap for direct waste connection to drainage piping. 7. Inlet Hoses: Two 60-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer inlet hoses with female,

garden-hose-thread couplings. Include rubber washers. 8. Drain Hose: One 48-inch- long, rubber household clothes washer drain hose with hooked

end.

B. Icemaker Outlet Boxes: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Acorn Engineering Company. b. IPS Corporation. c. LSP Products Group, Inc. d. Oatey. e. Plastic Oddities.

06/21/2019



2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Material and Finish: Enameled-steel, epoxy-painted-steel, or plastic box and faceplate. 4. Faucet: Valved fitting complying with ASME A112.18.1. Include NPS 1/2 or smaller

copper tube outlet. 5. Supply Shutoff Fitting: NPS 1/2 gate, globe, or ball valve and NPS 1/2 copper, water

tubing.

2.8 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Prier Products, Inc. d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products. g. Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM Industries, Inc. h. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASME A112.21.3M for exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Operation: Loose key. 5. Casing and Operating Rod: Of length required to match wall thickness. Include wall

clamp. 6. Inlet: NPS 3/4 or NPS 1. 7. Outlet: Concealed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 8. Box: Deep, flush mounted with cover. 9. Outlet: Exposed, with integral vacuum breaker and garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7. 10. Nozzle and Wall-Plate Finish: Polished nickel bronze. 11. Operating Keys(s): Two with each wall hydrant.

2.9 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.

06/21/2019



9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

2.10 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawingsor comparable product by one of the following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld Incorporated. 5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6. Mercer Gasket & Shim, Inc. 7. Metraflex, Inc. 8. Proco Products, Inc. 9. TOZEN Corporation. 10. Unaflex.Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company.

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig.

06/21/2019



2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

B. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

C. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

D. Install outlet boxes recessed in wall or surface mounted on wall. Install 2-by-4-inch fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking, wall reinforcement between studs. Comply with requirements for fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

E. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for ground equipment in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fire-retardant-treated-wood blocking is specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for electrical connections.

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 2. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies. 3. Carbonated-beverage-machine backflow preventers. 4. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 5. Calibrated balancing valves. 6. Outlet boxes.

06/21/2019



B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer, double-check, backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.


06/21/2019


FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 221124 - 1

SECTION 221124 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Manual gas shutoff valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Dielectric fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 5. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include meter bars and supports. 6. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple

06/21/2019



pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot . 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and

pressure regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.


A. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.

B. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators and service meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

06/21/2019



B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's written permission.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Service Regulators: 65 psig or 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

06/21/2019



2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including

bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings: a. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. b. Buna-nitrile seals. c. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. d. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or

steel pipe to steel pipe. e. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory

equipped with anode.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

06/21/2019



B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig . 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inchesto NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: BrassCraft, Conbraco 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Lee Brass, McDonald 2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


F. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: McDonald, Mueller, Xomox 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B.

06/21/2019



3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


G. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Homestead, McDonald, Mueller 2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements:

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for regulators

NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. Manufacturers: American Meter, Fisher, Invensys 2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.

06/21/2019



11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping.

12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 10 psig .

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Watts, McDonald, Wilkins 2. Description:

a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.


A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

06/21/2019



3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

D. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

06/21/2019



L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

O. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

P. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation.

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

5. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

06/21/2019



S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

T. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping."

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

06/21/2019



1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 20548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.8 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

06/21/2019



3.10 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting interior and exterior natural-gas piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel gloss. d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex gloss. d. Color: Gray.

2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd gloss. d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

06/21/2019



3.12 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.

3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat

pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

B. Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.15 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or threaded ends to match adjacent piping.

2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.

3.16 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be the following:

06/21/2019



1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

C. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, lubricated plug valve.

E. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be the following: 1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.


06/21/2019


SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

06/21/2019




A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Construction Manager's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

06/21/2019



C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. MG Piping Products Company.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277. 3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and

nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

06/21/2019



C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: [2 percent] <Insert slope> downward in direction of flow.

3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

N. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

06/21/2019



P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.

C. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 3. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 4. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

5. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

6. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting[, valve,] and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

06/21/2019



2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

06/21/2019



2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings]; CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

06/21/2019



B. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and

coupled joints.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints.


06/21/2019


SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts: a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawingsor comparable product by one of the following:

1) Josam Company.

06/21/2019



2) MIFAB, Inc. 3) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4) Tyler Pipe. 5) Watts Drainage Products. 6) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch as required to match

connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:

1. ASME A112.36.2M, Cast-Iron Cleanouts:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

b. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Josam Company. 2) Oatey. 3) Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 5) Tyler Pipe. 6) Watts Drainage Products. 7) Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 5. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 6. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 7. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron set-screws or other device. 8. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy. 9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 10. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. 11. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. 12. Size: Same as connected branch. 13. Housing: Stainless steel. 14. Closure: Stainless steel with seal. 15. Riser: Stainless-steel drainage pipe fitting to cleanout.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

06/21/2019



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawingsor comparable product by one of the following:

a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group

2. Pattern: Floor drain. 3. Body Material: Gray iron>. 4. Outlet: Bottom. 5. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze. 6. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 7. Trap Material: Cast iron>.

2.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES

A. Through-Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product


a. ProSet Systems Inc.

2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing

flange on one end for installation in cast-in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48/A 48M, gray-iron, hubless-pattern, wye branch with neoprene

O-ring at base and gray-iron plug in thermal-release harness. Include PVC protective cap for plug.

6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Open Drains:

B. Air-Gap Fittings:

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect

waste piping.

06/21/2019



C. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

C. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set

with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install through-penetration firestop assemblies in plastic [conductors] [and] [stacks] at floor penetrations.

E. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

06/21/2019



F. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

G. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

H. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.


06/21/2019


FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1

SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial, gas-fired, high-efficiency, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Domestic-water heater accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.

C. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

06/21/2019




A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Three years.

06/21/2019



2) Controls and Other Components: One year(s).

b. Compression Tanks: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Gas-Fired, High-Efficiency, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: Bradford White, Lochinvar, Rheem, A.O. Smith, State.

2. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3.

3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig minimum working-pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. 2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and

stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Lining: Glass complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending lining into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish. f. Burner or Heat Exchanger: Comply with UL 795 or approved testing agency

requirements for gas-fired, high-efficiency, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas fuel.

g. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. h. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices

or systems. i. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-

06/21/2019



pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Manufacturers: Amtrol, A.O. Smith, Taco.

2. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

E. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.

F. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

G. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 2. Oil-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ASME rated and stamped.

H. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

06/21/2019



2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heater specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heater to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install commercial domestic-water heaters on concrete base.

1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial domestic-water heaters if installation on stand, bracket, suspended platform, or directly on floor is indicated.

2. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 3. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 5. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 7. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 8. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves.

06/21/2019



2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control.

4. Comply with requirements for gas shutoff valves, gas pressure regulators, and automatic gas valves specified in Section 221124 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

D. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in water piping for domestic-water heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple domestic-water heaters. Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each domestic-water heater. Include shutoff valve and thermometer in each domestic-water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in each domestic-water heater outlet. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping," and comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

I. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of domestic-water heater storage tanks without integral or fitting-type heat traps.

J. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

K. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Section 221124 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

06/21/2019



C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 017300 "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage domestic-water heaters.


06/21/2019


PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. Inclusion of all plumbing fixtures, complete and ready for use. All fixtures, except as

otherwise specified, shall be constructed of vitreous china with all visible exposed surfaces glazed.

2. Providing all stops, traps, escutcheons, connections, etc., as are necessary to complete the installation of each fixture, whether such items are listed or not.

3. Plumbing Trim: All finished exposed faucets, traps, connecting piping, stops, flush valves and other fixture trim shall be chromium-plated brass unless otherwise specified and shall be supported rigidly to fixtures and to walls with matching brackets at not more than 2'-0" center. All fastenings shall be chromium-plated brass or may be 302 stainless steel if of matching color and finish. Faucets shall be furnished as required. Vacuum breakers shall be provided as a part of the fixture trim wherever there is a possibility of back-siphoning.

4. Fixture Stops: Shut-offs for urinal and water closet flush valves shall be an integral part of the fixture or fitting; shut-offs for all other fixtures shall be loose-key, lock-shield-type. All fixture stops shall be angle- or straight-type adapted for each particular location and shall be located immediately adjacent to the fixture. Use threaded adaptors when used in conjunction with copper tube work.

5. All exposed screws or fasteners for plumbing fixtures and faucets shall be vandalproof. Contractor shall take care to coordinate this item with his suppliers prior to Shop Drawings submittal.

6. Aerators, where required for sinks and lavatories shall be vandalproof


A. Meet the requirements of the following: 1. State Plumbing Code. 2. State Department of Housing, Buildings and Construction.

B. Material Standards 1. ANSI/ASME A112.19.2-90: Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 2. ANSI/ASME A112.19.3-87: Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential

Use). 3. ANSI/ASME A112.19.5-79: Trim for Water Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. 4. ANSI/ASSE 1016-90: Performance Requirements for Thermostatic, Pressure Balancing

and Combination Control Valves for Bathing Facilities.

C. ANSI/ASSE 1025-78: Performance Requirements for Diverters for Plumbing Faucets with Hose Spray, Anti-Siphon-Type, Residential Applications.

06/21/2019



1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fixtures.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories.

C. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

a. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.


A. Furnish extra materials that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed. 3. Filter Cartridges: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each type and size

indicated, but no less than 1 of each.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Plumbing Faucets: Chicago Faucet, American Standard, Kohler, Symmons, Speakman,

and Moen. 2. Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures: American Standard, Kohler, Gerber. 3. Service Basins: Fiat, Stern and Williams, Mustee, Zurn and Creative Industries. 4. Carriers: Josam, Smith, Wade, Watts, Zurn or Mifab.

B. Plumbing Fixtures – General: Constructed or equipped with anti-siphon devices to prevent siphoning waste material into potable water supply system.

C. Escutcheons and Plates: Conceal all holes where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings; use plates or escutcheons.

06/21/2019



D. Piping Exposed in Finished Areas (including fittings and trim): Chromium-plated or nickel-plated brass with polished bright surface.

E. Trim for Lavatories and Sinks: Provide with renewable cartridges.

F. Vitreous Caps: Provide for water closet bolts.

G. Sealant: Silicone-type. See Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation.

B. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Lavatories 1. Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. 2. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories.

a. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.

3. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

4. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

5. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

B. Seal joints between fixtures and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation:

1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

2. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. 3. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for

Plumbing Piping."

06/21/2019



C. Joint Sealing:

1. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant.

2. Match sealant color to water-closet color. 3. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixture with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust fixture and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixture

B. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow.

C. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.


A. Clean fixture and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

B. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings.

C. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


06/21/2019


HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 230000 - 1

SECTION 230000 - HVAC GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general requirements applicable to all HVAC work.

B. Provide complete and fully operational HVAC systems controlled as indicated.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: As indicated in other Division 23 Sections. 2. Shop Drawings: As indicated in other Division 23 Sections.


1. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

a. Building roofs, walls, and floors. b. Building structural components to which equipment, piping, ductwork, cables, and

conduit will be attached. c. Suspended ceiling components. d. HVAC equipment, piping, ductwork, and controls.

06/21/2019



e. Size and location of access doors and panels installed in walls and inaccessible ceilings for products installed behind walls and requiring access.

f. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

1) Luminaires. 2) Air outlets and inlets. 3) Ceiling-mounted devices including speakers, sensors, and WI-FI antennae. 4) Sprinklers. 5) Service access panels.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC systems and equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Provide data in pdf format on CD, DVD, or USB media.

2. Warranty Documentation: 3. Record Documentation: 4. Testing, adjusting and balancing report. 5. Start reports for all equipment. 6. Field reports, including ductwork leakage testing and piping pressure testing. 7. Valve tag charts. 8. Subcontractor contact list including name, phone number and email contact information. 9. Maintenance Items: Provide items specified in other Division 23 Sections packaged with

protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Where feasible, arrange for product delivery when construction has progressed enough to allow the products to be installed in their final locations. If lieu of the above, store products protected from weather and physical damage.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling too prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris and moisture into pipe.

C. Do not allow any materials or equipment to be stored in standing water or exposed to the elements.

D. Handle products to prevent damage. Do not install damaged items; replace them with new items. If approved by the Engineer, items with minor damage may be repaired and installed.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installation.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

06/21/2019



C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08.

D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied or partially occupied unless specifically allowed under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated.

1. Notify Owner at least seven days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. Identify extent and duration of utility interruptions and method of interruptions in detail.

2. Do not proceed with proposed utility interruptions without Owner’s permission. 3. Utilization of the permanently installed HVAC systems to condition or pressurize the

construction area is not allowed without prior specific written authorization from the Owner listing which equipment may be operated and under what limiting conditions and written agreement to compensate the Owner for utility usage.

E. New Equipment:

1. The rooftop air handling unit, and exhaust fan are to remain disabled and off unless TAB personnel are on-site actively testing the piece of equipment.

2. Utilization of the permanently installed HVAC systems to condition or pressurize the construction area is not allowed without prior specific written authorization from the Owner listing which equipment may be operated and under what limiting conditions and written agreement to compensate the Owner for utility usage.

F. Coordinate new installations with the existing installations which will remain in place and will be reutilized or those that are abandoned in place. Provide transitions and fittings in ductwork and piping as well as extra lengths of ductwork and piping as require to route around these existing installations. Illustrate all such ductwork fittings on the sheet metal shop drawing submittal. Existing installations include plumbing, piping, electrical and other building system components including, but not limited to, roof drain piping, sanitary piping, plumbing piping, fire protection piping and heads, heating and cooling water piping, condensate drains, steam and condensate return piping, conduit, cable tray, electrical pull boxes, projectors, booms, etc.

G. Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during the construction.

H. Provide the Owner a schedule prior to the start of demolition with a phased selected demolition identified by system and by floor. Identify required outages on the schedule and any temporary measures required to maintain existing systems in service.

I. Coordinate the HVAC demolition with all aspects of demolition and temporary construction (including dust barriers) by other trades.

J. The drawings indicate the general arrangement and scope of the systems and shall be followed insofar as possible. If deviations from the layout are necessitated by field conditions, detailed layouts of the proposed departures shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval before proceeding with the work.

K. The drawings are not intended to show every vertical and horizontal offset that may be necessary to complete the system or clear obstructions and/or the work of the other contractors and other trades. Contractors shall anticipate during bidding that additional offsets may be required and include same in their proposals.

06/21/2019



L. The drawings, schedules and specifications shall be considered to be cooperative and anything appearing in the Specifications may not be indicated on the drawings or vice-versa, shall be considered as part of the contract and must be executed by the contractor the same as though indicated by both. Clarify conflicting statements with the engineer prior to submitting a bid.

M. Measurements: Contractor shall make all his own measurements in the field and shall be responsible for correct fitting. He shall coordinate this work with all other branches and trades in such a manner as to cause a minimum of conflict or delay. The contractor shall coordinate his work in advance with all other trades and report immediately any difficulty which can be anticipated and propose solutions to resolve potential difficulty.

N. Clearances: All installations shall be made to maintain maximum headroom and clearance around equipment. When space and/or headroom appear inadequate, the contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to proceeding with the installation. No claims for additional compensations will be approved for failure on the part of the contractor or his subcontractor to comply with this requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the listed manufacturers. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design.

2.2 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment with higher electrical power requirements may be furnished provided that such proposed equipment is approved in writing and that connecting electrical supply, wiring, overcurrent protection devices, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine work area and rough-in work before beginning installation.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Plan Work beforehand.

B. Request explanation from the Engineer if the intent of the Drawings and/or Specifications is not clear.

3.3 HVAC DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 02 for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and cap remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services, remove equipment, and deliver to Owner.

C. If piping, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install mechanical items in accordance with the Specifications and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

06/21/2019



3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 for structural steel.

B. Metal channel (strut) products in accordance with Metal Framing Manufacturers Association standards may be used for metal framing and anchorages.

C. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.6 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting or weakening wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.7 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will contact grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth and level bearing surfaces for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom if specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

06/21/2019



C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Maintain manufacturer’s recommended service clearances. Maintain NFPA 70 required clearances to electrical components.

D. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

E. Install equipment to allow space for piping installed at required slope.

3.9 CLEANING AND RESTORATION

A. Repair damage resulting from the execution of the Work.

B. Leave the work area in broom clean condition or better at the end of each day.

C. Thoroughly clean the work area at the completion of construction.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect mechanical equipment components, assemblies, and installations, including connections.

B. Non-Conforming Work: Items will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Reports: Prepare test and inspection reports for informational submittals.

3.11 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09.

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.12 STARTUP

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to startup mechanical equipment according to manufacturer’s instructions.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions and provide electronic copy to Owner.


06/21/2019


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal framing systems. 2. Fiberglass strut systems. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, “Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports.”


A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components. 2. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for equipment.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication

and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: a. Metal framing systems. b. Fiberglass strut systems. c. Equipment supports.

06/21/2019



B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

C. Informational Submittals:

1. Welding certificates.

D. Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."


C. Seismic applications listed within SMACNA that are not usable within a given structure, shall be resolved through engineered adaptations or alteration. Whenever possible these adaptations or alternations shall use SMACNA approved components, to maintain compliance and uniformity with SMACNA’s engineering standards and design principles. In all cases, and prior to installation, these adaptations or alternations shall be engineered in accordance with standard engineering practices by a qualified, registered structural engineer, and shall be submitted to project structural engineer and mechanical engineer for their review and approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless-steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

06/21/2019



2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

B. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

06/21/2019



1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.5 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying equipment.

B. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

C. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

D. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

E. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

END OF SECTION 23 05 29

06/21/2019


IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Duct labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Warning tags.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each

identification material and device. 3. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the

proposed content for each label. 4. Valve numbering scheme.

B. Closeout Submittals:

1. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in operation and maintenance data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Brass: 0.032-inch, stainless steel: 0.025-inch, aluminum: 0.032-inch, or anodized aluminum: 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.


06/21/2019



B. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.


C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number where equipment is specified.

D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

06/21/2019



I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8-inch-thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include duct size and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils for Ducts:

1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for viewing distances up to 15 feet and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

2. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

B. Stencils for Access Panels and Door Labels, Equipment Labels, and Similar Operational Instructions:

1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances.

2. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

06/21/2019



3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray-can form.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air and variable temperature supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

06/21/2019



B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.


06/21/2019


TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing air systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Certified TAB reports.


1. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

2. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

3. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

06/21/2019



2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard AABC or NEBB TAB forms.

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide at least seven days' notice before each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.6 HVAC CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide TAB agency one complete set of contract documents, change orders, and approved submittals in digital pdf format.

B. Control contractor shall provide required BAS hardware, software, personnel, and assistance to TAB agency as required for TAB agency to balance the systems. Control contractor shall also provide trending reports as needed to demonstrate that systems are complete.

C. Coordinate meetings and assistance from suppliers and contractors as required by TAB agency.

D. Provide additional dampers, sheaves and belts as required by TAB agency.

E. Flag all manual volume dampers with high-visibility tape.

F. Provide access to all dampers, valves, test ports, nameplates, and other appurtenances as required by TAB agency.

G. Remove and replace or repair insulation as needed to provide access for the TAB work.

H. Have the HVAC systems at complete operational readiness before TAB begins.

I. Promptly correct deficiencies identified during TAB.

J. Maintain a construction schedule that allows the TAB agency to complete work prior to occupancy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

06/21/2019



B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC systems and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenums are sealed (and fire-stopped if required).

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that might cause reduced capacities.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment under actual installed conditions. Use tables and charts in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems" or in SMACNA "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, clean filters are installed, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, verifying that they are accessible and that their controls are connected, configured by the control contractor, and functioning.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for each equipment item.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. General:

06/21/2019



a. Electrical power wiring is complete. b. Control systems are operational. c. Access is provided to balancing and control devices. d. Safety devices are operational and indicating normal status.

2. Air Side:

a. Ductwork is complete with air terminals installed. b. Balance, fire, and smoke dampers are open and operational. c. Control dampers are in their normal (fail) positions. d. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. e. Clean filters are installed. f. Fans are operating and rotating in correct directions. g. Fan vibration levels are within tolerance limits. h. Building envelope is complete, and exterior windows and doors are closed.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC "National Standards for Total System Balance" or NEBB "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

2. Install new insulation where insulation is removed for TAB to match removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish.

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, fan-speed-control devices, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" duct layouts with all components identified.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

06/21/2019



G. Check condensate drains for proper connections and function.

H. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

3.5 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into a separate section for each tested and balanced system. Provide a final report that is a complete record of the HVAC system performance, including conditions of operation, any outstanding items, and any deviations found during the testing and balancing process. The final report is to provide a reference of actual operating conditions for the owner and operations personnel. All measurements and test results that appear in the report must be made on site and dated by the responsible technician or test and balance engineer.

B. As a minimum the report shall include the following information:

1. Title page, including:

a. TAB company name, address, and telephone number. b. Project name, client, identification number, and location. c. Project architectural firm, address, and telephone number. d. Project HVAC engineering firm, address, and telephone number. e. Project HVAC contracting firm, address, and telephone number. f. TAB certification statement. g. Test and balance engineer name, signature, and certification number. h. Report date.

2. Table of contents. 3. TAB national performance guarantee. 4. Report summary, including:

a. List of items that do not meet specified tolerances. b. Information that may be considered in resolving deficiencies.

5. Instrument list, including:

a. Type. b. Manufacturer. c. Model. d. Serial number. e. Calibration date.

C. TAB test data for all systems included in the Work.

3.6 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

06/21/2019



1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat or temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance positions. d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner’s Representative.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner’s Representative.

3. Owner’s Representative shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to 10 percent of the total measurements recorded.

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and adjust. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's payment.


3.7 SCHEDULE

A. Provide air balancing for each of the following equipment items as part of this work. Note that listing an item of equipment includes any motors, valves, dampers, and filters associated with that equipment:

1. Control dampers

06/21/2019



2. Fans 3. Air outlets and inlets 4. Refrigerant condensing units 5. Refrigerant condensers 6. Packaged rooftop units


06/21/2019


MECHANICAL INSULATION 230700 - 1

SECTION 230700 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to; 1. Pipe insulation 2. Duct insulation 3. Equipment insulation 4. Insulation adhesives, mastics and caulking

B. Definitions 1. Concealed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork, and equipment in walls, partitions,

floors, pipe chases, pipe shafts, duct shafts, sealed alleyways, and above suspended ceilings.

2. Exposed Insulated Surfaces: Piping, ductwork, and equipment located in mechanical rooms, tunnels, and rooms without suspended ceilings.

3. Runouts: Piping to individual terminal units not more than 4 ft. in length.


A. Comply with fire and smoke hazard ratings indicated. 1. Test by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723. 2. The system rating shall be based on adhesives, mastics, cements, jacket, tapes, and

insulation. Any treatments of jackets or facings to impede flame and smoke must be permanent.

3. Following are rating requirements: a. Flame Spread (maximum): 25 b. Smoke Developed (maximum): 50

4. Properly identify products and/or their shipping cartons for flame and smoke ratings. 5. Where prohibited by code or local ordinances, do not use elastomeric type insulation

anywhere within ceiling plenum return air systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings 1. Submit schedule indicating service, application, thickness and finishes.

B. Product Data 1. Manufacturer's cut sheets and literature 2. Performance data

C. Samples: Not required for review.

D. Reference Submittals: Not required for review.

06/21/2019



E. Contract Closeout Information 1. Manufacturer's installation, maintenance, and painting data 2. Guarantees

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass Fiber Pipe Covering 1. Manville 2. Owens-Corning 3. Manson 4. Knauf

B. Duct Insulation 1. Owens-Corning 2. Certain-Teed 3. Knauf 4. Manson

C. Fire Retardant Adhesive 1. Manville 2. Benjamin Foster 3. 3M 4. Insul-Coustic 5. Childers

D. Elastomeric Pipe Insulation and Equipment Covering 1. Armacell - Armaflex 2. IMCOA - Imcolock 3. Aeroflex - Aerocel

E. Lagging Adhesive 1. Manville 2. Benjamin Foster 3. Borden 4. Insul-Coustic

F. Insulated Fitting Covers 1. Manville 2. Certain-Teed 3. Knauf

G. Insulation Caulking 1. Dow No. 11 2. Certain-Teed 3. Knauf

06/21/2019



2.2 GENERAL

A. Provide fire and smoke hazard ratings as indicated for entire composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation).

B. Do not use material that exceeds specified flame and smoke ratings.

C. Use permanent treatments to jackets or facings to impart specified fire ratings.

D. Use of water soluble treatments is prohibited.

E. At Hangers and Bracing: See Section 23 05 29.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION, FLEXIBLE

A. Pipe Insulation, flexible: Aeroflex - Aerocel flexible elastomeric pipe insulation. 1. Thermal conductivity (K value): Not greater than 0.245 at mean temperature of 75F.

Rated for working temperature of 250F. 2. Apply to the following (Suction & Liquid line) piping in thickness indicated:

a. Refrigerant: 1) Mains to 2 inch.....…...............1 inch 2) 1 inch and smaller......….............1 inch 3) 1-1/4 inch and larger.....…...........1-1/2 inch

b. Refrigerant distribution boxes to be insulated per manufacturer’s recommendations.

2.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION, RIGID

A. Ductwork Insulation, Rigid: O-C Fiberglas Type 703/705 Industrial Insulation with ASJ vapor barrier jacket. 1. Concealed Ductwork: Use foiled reinforced Kraft (FRK) facing. 2. Thermal Conductivity (K value): Not greater than 0.23 at mean temperature of 75F. 3. Apply to following ductwork in thickness indicated:

a. Outside air ductwork (rectangular): 2 in. b. Relief air/exhaust air plenums behind louvers: 2 in. c. Factory packaged air handling units, mixed air and discharge plenums and

ductwork, component housings to fan unit inlet including transition sections: 2 in. d. Fan discharge transition to and including final filter housings: 2 in. e. All exposed supply air ductwork passing through occupied spaces (except

equipment rooms): 1 in. 4. Do not apply over coil and damper access panels or over internally lined ductwork.

2.5 DUCTWORK INSULATION, FLEXIBLE

A. Ductwork Insulation, Flexible: O-C Fiberglass Commercial Grade Faced Duct Wrap Insulation with FRK vapor barrier jacket and 2 in. tab. 1. Thermal Conductivity (K value): Not greater than 0.28 at mean temperature of 75F. 2. Apply to following ductwork in thickness indicated:

06/21/2019



a. Supply air ductwork in equipment rooms and where concealed within occupied spaces including above ceilings and in shafts: 1-1/2 in.

b. Return air ductwork in non-air-conditioned areas (including utility shafts): 1-1/2 in.

c. Return/relief air ductwork from relief plenum at louver (or other outside opening) back to relief air damper plus 36 in.: 1-1/2 in.

d. Exhaust air ductwork from exhaust plenum at louver (or other outside opening) back to exhaust air damper (motorized or gravity) plus 36 in.: 1-1/2 in.

e. Return or exhaust ductwork passing through outside air plenums (shafts, ductwork, tunnels, etc.): 1-1/2 in.

3. Apply to all supply air and return air ductwork from unit housing to ends of duct runs, including diffuser necks and register ducts.

4. Do not apply insulation over coil and damper access panels or over internally lined ductwork.

2.6 SULATION FASTENERS

A. Insulation Adhesive: Childers CP-82

B. Insulation Mastic: Childers CP-30

C. Insulation Caulking: Dow No. 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION - GENERAL

A. Do not insulate piping until satisfactory completion of required pressure tests.

B. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces with pipe and duct surfaces at room temperature.

C. Butt insulation firmly together with longitudinal and end joints sealed with compatible jackets, facings and adhesives as specified.

D. Apply adhesives, mastics and coatings per manufacturer's recommendations and as specified.

E. On cold surfaces where vapor barrier jackets are used, apply insulation with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal. 1. Adequately insulate and vapor seal hangers, supports, and anchors that are secured

directly to cold surfaces to prevent condensation.

F. Continue insulation through sleeves and wall and ceiling openings except insulation shall not continue through fire rated (2 hour or greater) partitions, walls, floor-ceiling systems.

G. Insulate all fittings, valve bodies, flanges and other pipeline accessories.

H. At hangers and bracing, install in accord with Section 23 05 29.

06/21/2019



I. Contractors shall consult manufacturer's Technical Bulletins for detailed information on safety precautions in using all insulation products, polyurethanes, polyisocyanurates, and related materials. The data shall describe fire and other risks, safety in handling, toxicity, threshold limit values, physiological effects of inhalation and eye and skin contact, incompatibilities and other essential information regarding use. Obtain six (6) copies for distribution and use at jobsite and for submittal with shop drawing submittals.

3.2 APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE PIPE INSULATION

A. Install tubing wherever possible by slipping material over piping. Otherwise slit pipe insulation, tightly butt ends and seal butt joints and slit seams with suitable adhesive.

B. Insulate fittings and valve bodies with segments cut from pipe insulation. Apply with adhesive.

C. Insulate piping at hanger points with fiberglass material protected with metal saddles.

D. Cover all insulated piping exposed to weather with additional jacket of 0.016 inch smooth aluminum with moisture barrier. 1. Apply aluminum jacket with 0.020 inch x 3/8 inch aluminum bands on 9-inch centers,

minimum 2-inch lap joint. 2. Protect fittings, valves, and specialties exposed to weather in like manner. 3. Contractor option: Use Ceel-Co 300 Series plastic jacketing applied per manufacturer's

recommendations.

3.3 APPLICATION OF RIGID DUCT INSULATION

A. Apply insulation with edges tightly butted and impaled over mechanical fasteners such as welded pins and secure with speed clips. 1. Space pins to hold insulation securely in place but not over 18 in. centers.

B. Seal butt joints and pine clips with 3 in. wide pressure sensitive joint sealing tape to match jacket. 1. Staple corners of tape patches and coat with mastic.

C. Where access not possible for pin attachment brush apply adhesive covering entire surface or apply calk in continuous bead on 6 in. centers.

D. Reinforce edges with metal corner angle.

3.4 APPLICATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Cold Ductwork: Apply insulation with edges tightly butted and secured to metal surface with 4 in. wide strips of adhesive on 12 in. centers. 1. At all joints lap facing tab over adjoining facing 2 in. and seal with lap adhesive or use 3

in. wide pressure sensitive joint sealing tape to match jacket. 2. Secure lap with staples on 6 in. centers. 3. Seal staples with mastic (Foster 35-00-GPM).

06/21/2019



4. On ductwork over 24 in. wide (rectangular and flat oval) impale insulation to bottom of duct over mechanical fasteners such as welded pins and secure with speed clips.

5. Space pins to hold insulation securely in place but not over 18 in. centers. 6. Seal clips with 3 in. wide tape patches, staple corners and seal with mastic.


06/21/2019


REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300 - 1

SECTION 232300 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Tubes. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining Materials. 4. Specialties.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

B. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications: 1. “Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code” 2. B16.22 “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings” 3. B31.5 “Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components”

C. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (Former American Society for Testing and Materials) 1. B88 “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube” 2. B280 “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and

Refrigeration Field Service”

D. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications: 1. A5.8 "Specification for Filler Metals For Brazing And Braze Welding"

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry. (MSS) Publications: 1. SP-69 “ANSI/MSS Edition Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application”

F. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards: 1. 207 “Standard for Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical” 2. 429 “Standard for Electrically Operated Valves”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. 1. Product Data for each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified. 2. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Contractor shall size and design the

piping configuration and install the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of connected equipment.

06/21/2019



3. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.

4. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 01 Sections.


A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes: 1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping." 2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Non-electrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Henry Pratt Company, Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. b. Parker-Hannifin Corporation; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division c. Sporlan Valve Company

2.2 TUBES

A. Use pre-charged tubing where possible.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, annealed temper.

2.3 TUBE FITTINGS

A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.

2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).

2.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

06/21/2019



A. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig operating pressure, 200 deg F operating temperature; forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color-coded moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.

B. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure, 225 deg F maximum operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections; molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Above ground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.

B. Below ground for 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) annealed-copper tubing installed in schedule 40 PVC sleeve.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 23 05 00 (15050) - "Common Work Results For HVAC."

C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.

E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. Maximum fill: 40%

F. Below ground, install copper tubing in schedule 40 PVC conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.

G. Insulate suction lines. 1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been

eliminated.

H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.

06/21/2019



I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.

J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to

compressor. 2. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical

runs. 3. Liquid lines may be installed level.

K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.

N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-inch NPS (DN50).

O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure-regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

P. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Q. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near bulb of expansion valve.

R. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.

S. Charge and purge systems, after testing, dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15 procedures.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section 23 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-69.

B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes. Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88. 1. 1/2 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. 5/8 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. 1 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. 1-1/4 Inches: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 5. 1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.5 PIPE INSULATION

06/21/2019



A. Piping insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 “HVAC Insulation”.

3.6 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install permanent filter dryers in low-temperature systems using hermetic compressors, and before each solenoid valve.

3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Section 23 05 00 - "Common Work Results for HVAC."

B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent formation of scale.

3.8 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for electrical connections.


A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200

psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.

3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with trichloroethylene.

06/21/2019



3.13 COMMISSIONING

A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35 deg is indicated

on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum

pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-

operating charge.


06/21/2019


METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Sheet Metal Materials. 2. Duct Liner. 3. Sealant Materials. 4. Hangers and Supports. 5. Duct Fabrication.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (Former American Society for Testing and Materials) 1. A36 “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel” 2. A336 “Standard Specification for Alloy Steel Forgings for Pressure and High-

Temperature Parts” 3. A480 “Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and

Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip” 4. A653 "Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process” 5. C168 “Standard Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulation” 6. C411 “Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature

Thermal Insulation” 7. C916 “Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation” 8. C920 “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants” 9. C1071 “Standard Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation (Thermal and

Sound Absorbing Material)”

B. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications: 1. D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 2. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum" 3. D9.1 “Sheet Metal Welding Code“

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 1. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems” 2. 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems” 3. 96 “Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking

Operations”

D. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Publications: 1. AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

06/21/2019



E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) Publications: 1. “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” 2. “HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in ASTM C168.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air-moving and -distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the Engineer of Record. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. 1. Product Data:

a. For duct liner and sealing materials. 2. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article. 3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements. 4. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and

installed accessories and devices.


A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel" for hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

06/21/2019




A. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained through fabrication and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.

B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A366, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled, exposed matte finish.

C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized, sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 DUCT LINER

A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

B. Materials: ASTM C1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers. 1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed

rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C411. 4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C916. 5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct. a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular

to duct wall. b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without

projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream. c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard

classification of duct liner system.

2.3 SEALANT MATERIALS

06/21/2019



A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics. 1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced. 2. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl

sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids. 3. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,

complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for building materials. 1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inches thick. 2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod. 1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or

galvanized rods with threads painted after installation. 2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--

Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.

C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A36/A36M. 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.

2.5 FABRICATION - RECTANGULAR DUCT

A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals. 1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity

class required for pressure classification. 2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks,

stains, and discolorations.

B. Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with 0.0598-inch-thick, carbon-steel sheet for concealed ducts and 0.0500-inch-thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and joints. Comply with NFPA 96.

2.6 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS

06/21/2019



A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are prohibited.

B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.

C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.

D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping.

E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: 1. Fan discharge. 2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

H. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.

2.7 FABRICATION - ROUND DUCT

A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

2.8 FABRICATION - ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING

A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for longitudinal seam straight duct.

B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.

C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter. Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows: 1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise indicated.

06/21/2019



2. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.

3. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

4. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored construction.

5. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow.

6. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with two-piece welded construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.

B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.

C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and connections.

F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.

G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, unless specifically indicated.

K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults, electrical equipment spaces and enclosures, and through elevator equipment rooms.

06/21/2019



M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping."

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse and longitudinal joints.

C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.

D. Materials: 3M Brand No. 800.

3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING

A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one-fourth of failure (proof-test) load.

E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 23 33 00 (15820) "Duct Accessories."

B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."

C. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."

06/21/2019



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Refer to Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed procedures.

3.6 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system. Vacuum interior as well as exterior of ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and debris.


06/21/2019


AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Manual-Volume Dampers 2. Fire Dampers 3. Ceiling radiation dampers 4. Turning Vanes 5. Duct-Mounted Access Doors 6. Flexible Connectors 7. Flexible Ducts 8. Accessories

1.2 REFERENCES

A. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Publications: 1. AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications: 1. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems” 2. 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems”

C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) Publications: 1. “Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems” 2. “HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible”

D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards: 1. 181 “Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors” 2. 181B “Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors” 3. 555 “Fire Dampers” 4. 555C “Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. 1. Product Data: For the following:

a. Manual-volume dampers. b. Fire dampers. c. Duct-mounted access doors. d. Flexible ducts.

06/21/2019



2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size of each field connection. Detail the following: a. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations. b. Fire damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and

panels. 3. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise

power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and weights.


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. manuals (SMACNA) except where details or notes on drawings indicate otherwise. 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible. 2. Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems.

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard for Safety UL 181, UL 555.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials” that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Manual Volume Dampers.

a. Ruskin Company b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.)

2. Fire Dampers. a. Ruskin Company b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.)

3. Ceiling Fire Dampers a. Ruskin Company b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.)

4. Flexible Connectors.

06/21/2019



a. Ventfabrics, Inc. b. Ward Industries, Inc. c. Vent Products Co.

5. Flexible Ducts. a. Clevaflex. Ltd. b. Approved Substitution

2.2 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS

A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch

thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Nonferrous. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

C. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS

A. General: Labeled to UL 555.

B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hour unless noted otherwise.

C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch- thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch or 0.138 inch thick and length to suit application. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements.

E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034 inch thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.

G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.

06/21/2019



H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 F rated as indicated.

I. Provide access door in duct adjacent to each fire damper.

2.4 CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS

1. Ruskin Company CFD series. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Pottorff. 5. Safe Air – Dowco Products.

B. General Requirements:

1. Labeled according to UL 555C. 2. Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as

indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

C. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.

D. Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.

E. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F or 212 deg F rated, fusible links.

F. Fire Rating: 1, 2, or 3 hours as indicated.

2.5 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible."

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2 inch wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ducts.

2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. General: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass.

06/21/2019



2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel. Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

C. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 4-3/8 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel Select metal compatible with connected ducts.

D. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with polychloroprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Minimum Movement: 2 inches.

E. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a chemical-resistant coating (For use in pool area equipment room). 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp, and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Minimum Movement: 2 inches.

2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum. For use on dryer vents only.

C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket enclosing 1-1/2-inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner. 1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner. 2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral

fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord. 3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.

D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: 1. Provide blank off panels for unused portions of louvers. Panels shall be double wall

construction with 0.032 inch aluminum, and 2 inch thick, internal glass fiber insulation in accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.”

B. Open ducts in suspended ceiling: No. 16 USSG, ¾ inch square mesh, screen over each opening; with 1 inch wide galvanized steel enclosing frame and flanged duct opening to receive frame.

06/21/2019



In lieu or screen and volume damper, provide register or grille plus opposed blade volume damper.

C. Duct sleeves: Minimum 20 gauge USSG galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Clearances:

a. Non-insulated duct: 1 inch between duct and sleeve on all sides. b. Insulated duct: 1 inch between insulation and sleeve on all sides. c. Grilles, registers and diffusers: Zero clearance.

2. Provide closure collars for exposed ducts on each side of wall or floor opening. Collars shall be galvanized sheet metal, minimum 4 inch wide, and fit tight against surface and around duct or insulation. Install with nails 6 inch on center.

3. Framed openings: Provide clearances and closure collars the same as for duct sleeves. 4. Duct-mounted automatic control devices: Mount on mechanical equipment all devices

related to automatic controls such as automatic dampers.

D. Cleanout Doors ( Laundry Dryer Exhaust): Horizontal ducts shall be mounted maximum 20 ft. apart and in change of direction. Cleanout doors on horizontal duct shall be mounted on side of duct. Bottom edge shall be not less than 2 inch above bottom of duct. Cleanout doors at veritical ducts shall be mounted at base. Door and frame shall be same gauge as duct. Hinges shall be Ventlock No. 260, extra heavy zinc plated. Latches shall be Ventlock No. 140, cast zinc. Gaskets shall be between door and frame. Gaskets shall be 1/8 inch double thickness rated 2,000 deg F for kitchen exhaust system. Cleanout door size shall be maximum 24 inch x 24 inch and minimum shall be 24 inch one side, and other side shall be 2 inch less than duct height.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.

D. Install fire dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. 1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.

E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, automatic dampers, smoke detectors, outside and exhaust air plenums equipment, and other locations as indicated. 1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,

adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units. 2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.

F. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

06/21/2019



G. Provide flexible connections at fan and building joints.

H. Install automatic dampers supplied by the automatic temperature control system manufacturer. Notch end of rod and label duct/casing to indicate open and closed blade position.

I. Provide volume dampers at following locations: 1. In all duct splits and branch connections of supply, return, and exhaust systems. 2. Ducts connecting to common plenums. 3. Ducts serving single outlet. 4. At open return duct in hung ceiling. 5. Other locations as indicated on drawings.

J. Provide access doors in following locations and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Automatic dampers: linkage side. 2. Main balancing dampers. 3. Fire dampers. 4. Smoke detection heads. 5. On both sides of ducts where necessary to provide maintenance accessibility to

equipment on the other side. 6. Outside air and exhaust air plenums.

K. Flexible Duct Installation: 1. Installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA and local building code standards. 2. Flexible duct runs shall be a maximum of 5 feet, straight lengths, no bends. 3. Connections to beaded sheet metal fittings shall be with 3 wraps of approved tape and

stainless steel draw band for tight seal. Seal the outer jacket with 3 wraps of approved UL 181B tape.

4. A 1 ½” minimum strap shall be used to support the flexible duct at a distance not greater than 5’-0”. Maximum permissible sag is ½” per foot of duct length.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC”.


06/21/2019


FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 1

SECTION 233346 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-insulated flexible ducts. 2. Insulated flexible ducts.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts. Include plans showing locations and mounting and

attachment details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA 006 "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Comply with Air Diffusion Council "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1."

D. Comply with ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials."

2.2 NON-INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill Airflow LLC. 3. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group. 4. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

06/21/2019



B. Non-Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.

C. Non-Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

2.3 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS


1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill Airflow LLC. 3. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group. 4. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: R6.

C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F. 4. Insulation R-Value: R6.

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS

A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.

B. Non-Clamp Connectors: Liquid adhesive plus tape.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA006 for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116 for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork should not be exposed to UV lighting.

C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions or correct misalignments.

D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

E. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape or draw bands.

F. Installation:

1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Centerline radius of bends of flexible ducting shall not be less than one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits. 5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line, without sags, twists, or turns except as noted

elsewhere.

G. Supporting Flexible Ducts:

1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 48 inches apart. Maximum centerline sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per 12 inches.

2. Install extra supports at bends approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend.

3. Ducts may rest on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions.

4. Vertically installed ducts shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches on center.


06/21/2019


HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevation.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan sound-power ratings. c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. d. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. f. Roof curbs.


1. Field quality-control reports.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

D. Maintenance Material Submittals:

1. Belts: One spare set for each belt-driven unit.


A. AMCA Compliance:

06/21/2019



1. Comply with AMCA performance requirements and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

2. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. Broan 4. Twin City Fan & Blower.

B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheel directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shroud, motor, and fan wheel removable for service.

D. Grille: Stainless steel, aluminum, or painted aluminum grille with flange. Grille attached to fan housing.

E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

F. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

2. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 3. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless-steel

springs, and fusible link. 4. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. 5. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors as indicated on Drawings and specified in another Division

06/21/2019



23 Section. Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301. Factory test fans according to AMCA 300. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210. Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install fans and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

D. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. Coordinate roof curb installation with General Contractor.

E. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors.

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.



B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

06/21/2019



3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension where applicable. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Provide and verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.



06/21/2019


DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Action Submittal:

1. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

a. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

b. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

2. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

a. Ceiling suspension assembly members. b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. c. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. d. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. e. Duct access panels.

3. Color Samples for Initial Selection: For each product with factory-applied color finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Titus. 2. Price. 3. Krueger. 4. Hart & Cooley. 5. Metalaire. 6. Nailor Industries Inc.

06/21/2019



7. Tuttle & Bailey.

2.2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

A. Architectural Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 4. Face Style: Plaque. 5. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 6. Accessories: Factory-insulated R-6 foil-backed insulation.

B. Square Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 4. Face Style: Cones (three). 5. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 6. Accessories: Factory-insulated R-6 foil-backed insulation.

C. Linear Slot Ceiling Diffuser: 1. Material: Aluminum with steel Pattern Controller. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 4. Slot Width: Refer to schedule. 5. Number of Slots: Refer to schedule. 6. Length: Refer to schedule. 7. Accessories: Factory Fabricated Plenum. Insulate around exterior of plenum.

D. Eggcrate Grille and Register: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch. 4. Face Size: Refer to schedule. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Mounting: Lay-In or Surface Mount, refer to schedule. 7. Damper (Register Only): Adjustable opposed-blade assembly. 8. Face Size: Refer to schedule 9. Face Arrangement: 3/16-inch perforated holes on 1/4-inch staggered centers.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

D. Provide sponge rubber gasket, mounting frame, and concealed fastener mounting on all surface mounted grilles and registers.

E. Paint inside portion on all ductwork and plenums visible behind air device non-specular flat black enamel.

F. Provide additional support for grilles, registers, and diffusers mounted in lay-in ceiling.

G. Provide non-specular flat black steel blank-offs behind all unused portions of linear air devices.

H. Coordinate exact location of Diffusers, Grilles and Registers with area smoke detectors, lights, and electrical devices. Air devices shall not be closer than 3 feet from area smoke detector.

I. Final location of diffusers, registers and grilles shall be from architectural reflected ceiling plans.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


06/21/2019

Five Rivers MetroParks 369580Adventure Central – Kitchen Modifications & Upgrades

06/05/2019

GAS-FIRED FURNACES 23 54 16.13 - 1

SECTION 23 54 16.13 - GAS-FIRED FURNACES AND CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters. 3. Refrigeration components.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Product Data: For each type of product.

a. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

2. Shop Drawings:

a. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

b. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


1. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each furnace and associated items to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

2. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

a. Disposable Air Filters: Furnish one complete set. b. Disposable Air-Cleaner Media: Furnish one complete set.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019



A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in:

1. ASHRAE 62.1. 2. ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period:

1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years. b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years. d. Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years. e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING


1. Bryant Heating & Cooling Systems; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 2. Carrier Corporation; a unit of United Technologies Corp. 3. Goodman Manufacturing Company, L.P. 4. Rheem Manufacturing Company; Heating and Cooling Products. 5. Trane. 6. YORK; a Johnson Controls company.

B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel.

1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger with factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019


4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive.

1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23. 2. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and

permanent lubrication.

D. Type of Gas: Natural.

E. Heat Exchanger:

1. Primary: Aluminized steel. 2. Secondary: Stainless steel.

F. Burner:

1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety modulating main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.

2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.

G. Gas-Burner Safety Controls:

1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven; stops gas flow on ignition failure.

2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on

excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

H. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings pre-purges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.

I. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories; diagnostic light with viewport.

J. Accessories:

1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: CPVC plastic fitting to combine combustion-air inlet and vent through exterior wall or roof (as indicated on Drawings).

2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials:

a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019


2.3 THERMOSTATS

A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, "Controls."

B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounted, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with automatic switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, vacation mode, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.

2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. Disposable Filters: 2-inch-thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 8 or higher.

B. Filter Frame: Sheet metal frame with hinged access door and filter tracks.

C. Filter Sizes: Filters shall be in sizes readily available without requiring custom fabrication.

2.5 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements:

1. Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free refrigerants.

2. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IES 90.1.

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with AHRI 210/240. Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with ASHRAE 62.1.

1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace, with access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections.

1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534/C 534M, Type I, 1 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Division 23.

E. Air-Cooled Compressor-Condenser Unit:

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019


2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed scroll type.

a. Crankcase heater. b. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor. c. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload devices, start

capacitor, relay, and contactor. d. Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch and

automatic-reset low-pressure switch.

e. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A.

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with AHRI 210/240, and with liquid subcooler.

4. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat. 5. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 6. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 7. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 8. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine factory-installed insulation before furnace installation. Reject units that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for gas and refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions.

1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.

C. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at code-required mounting height.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019


D. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

E. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on reinforced concrete base; at least 4 inches larger on each side than unit footprint. Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt.

1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. 2. Remove dirt and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and

fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, Appendix.

4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

D. Connect ducts to furnace with flexible connector. Comply with requirements in Division 23.

E. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled compressor-condenser unit.

1. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

2. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

3. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.

F. Comply with requirements in Division 23 for installation and joint construction of refrigerant piping.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019




1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair

leaks, replace lost refrigerant, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Inspect for physical damage to unit casings. 2. Verify that access doors move freely and are weathertight. 3. Clean units and inspect for construction debris. 4. Verify that all bolts and screws are tight. 5. Adjust vibration isolation and flexible connections. 6. Verify that controls are connected and operational.

B. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions and complete manufacturer's operational checklist.

C. Measure and record airflows.

D. Verify proper operation of capacity control device.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

06/21/2019


06/05/2019


B. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensing units.

END OF SECTION 23 54 16.13

06/21/2019


PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 237413 - 1

SECTION 237413 - PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The components included in this specification consists of the following: 1. Package roof top unit.

B. Definitions: Roof Top Air Handling Unit (Roof Top Units, RTU): A factory fabricated assembly consisting of fan, coils, filters, and other necessary equipment to perform one or more of the following functions of circulating, cleaning, heating, cooling, humidifying, dehumidifying, and mixing of air. Design capacities of units shall be as scheduled on the drawings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit unit performance data including: capacity, nominal and operating performance.

B. Submit Mechanical Specifications for unit and accessories describing construction, components and options.

C. Submit shop drawings indicating overall dimensions as well as installation, operation and services clearances. Indicate lift points and recommendations and center of gravity. Indicate unit shipping, installation and operating weights including dimensions.

D. Submit data on electrical requirements, wiring diagram, and connection points. Include recommended wire and fuse sizes or MCA, sequence of operation, safety and start-up instructions.

E. Shop drawings submitted for approval shall be accompanied by a copy of the purchase agreement between the Contractor and an authorized service representative of the manufacturer for check, test and start up and first year service.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for rigging, unloading, and transporting units.

B. Protect units from physical damage. Leave factory-shipping covers in place until installation.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide parts warranty (excluding refrigerant) for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first.

06/21/2019



B. Provide five-year extended warranty for compressors.

C. Provide five-year heat exchanger limited warranty.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Unit shall conform to ANSI Z21.47/UL1995 for construction of packaged air conditioner 1. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer must, at his expense, provide

for a field inspection by a UL representative to verify conformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative, at no additional expense to the Owner.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide one set of filters.

B. Furnish a complete set of fan motor drive belts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUMMARY

A. The contractor shall provide and install package rooftop unit. The unit(s) shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS 1. Trane, Carrier, AAON

2.2 GENERAL UNIT DESCRIPTION

A. Unit(s) furnished and installed shall be DX/Gas packaged rooftop (s) as scheduled on contract documents and these specifications. Cooling capacity ratings shall be based on AHRI Standard. Unit(s) shall consist of insulated weather-tight casing with compressor(s), air-cooled condenser coil, condenser fans, evaporator coil, return-air filters, supply motors and unit controls

B. Unit(s) shall be 100% factory run tested and fully charged with R-410A

C. Unit(s) shall have labels, decals, and/or tags to aid in the service of the unit and indicate caution areas.

D. Units shall be convertible airflow design as manufactured.

E. Wiring internal to the unit shall be colored and numbered for identification.

2.3 UNIT CASING

06/21/2019



A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel, phosphatized, and finished with an air-dry paint coating with removable access panels. Structural members shall be 18 gauge with access doors and removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.

B. Units cabinet surface shall be tested 1000 hours in salt spray test in compliance with ASTM B117.

C. Cabinet construction shall allow for all service/ maintenance from one side of the unit.

D. Cabinet top cover shall be one piece construction or where seams exits, it shall be double-hemmed and gasket-sealed.

E. Access shall have a raised 1 1/8 inch high lip around the supply and return openings for water integrity.

F. Insulation: Provide 1/2 inch thick fiberglass insulation with foil face on all exterior panels in contact with the return and conditioned air stream. All edges must be captured so that there is no insulation exposed in the air stream.

G. Provide openings either on side of unit or through the base for power, control, condensate, and gas connections.

H. The base of the unit shall have 3 sides for forklift provisions. The base of the units shall have rigging/lifting holes for crane maneuvering.

2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. Air Filters: Factory installed filters shall mount integral within the unit and shall be accessible through access panels. One-inch thick glass fiber disposable media filters shall be provided with the provisions within the unit for MERV 8 2 inch thick filters to be field- provided and installed.

2.5 FANS AND MOTORS

A. Provide evaporator fan section with forward curved, double width, double inlet, centrifugal type fan.

B. Provide self-aligning, grease lubricated, ball or sleeve bearings with permanent lubrication fittings.

C. Provide units 4 tons and below with direct drive, multiple speed, dynamically balanced supply fans.

D. Provide units 5 tons and above with belt driven, supply fans with adjustable motor sheaves.

E. Outdoor and Indoor Fan shall be permanently lubricated and have internal thermal overload protection.

F. Outdoor fans shall be direct drive, statically and dynamically balanced, draw through in the vertical discharge position.

06/21/2019



G. Provide shafts constructed of solid hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with key-way, and protectively coated with lubricating oil.

2.6 GAS FIRED HEATING SECTION

A. Completely assembled and factory installed heating system shall be integral to unit, UL or CSA approved specifically for outdoor applications for use downstream from refrigerant cooling coils. Threaded connection with plug or cap provided. Provide capability for gas piping.

B. Heating section shall be factory run tested prior to shipment.

C. Induced draft combustion type with direct spark ignition system, redundant main gas valve, and 2-staged heat.

D. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Provide safety controls for the proving of combustion air prior to ignition, and continuous flame supervision. Provide flame rollout switches.

E. Induced draft blower shall have combustion air proving switches and built-in thermal overload protection on fan motor.

F. Heat Exchanger: Provide tubular section type constructed from 18-gauge aluminized steel.

G. Burners: Burners shall be of the in-shot type constructed of stainless steel.

H. Limit controls: High temperature limit controls will shut off gas flow in the event of excessive temperatures resulting from restricted indoor airflow or loss of indoor airflow.

2.7 EVAPORATOR COIL

A. Provide configured aluminum fin surface mechanically bonded to copper tubing coil.

B. Provide an independent expansion device for each refrigeration circuit. Factory pressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.

C. Provide factory installed thermal expansion valve (TXV) for each refrigerant circuit. Factory pressure tested at 450 psig and leak tested at 200 psig.

D. Provide a removable, reversible, cleanable double sloped drain pan for base of evaporator coil constructed of PVC.

2.8 CONDENSER SECTION

A. Provide vertical discharge, direct drive fans with aluminum blades. Fans shall be statically balanced. Motors shall be permanently lubricated, with integral thermal overload protection in a weather tight casing.

2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM

06/21/2019



A. Compressor(s): Provide scroll compressor with direct drive operating at 3600 rpm. Integral centrifugal oil pump. Provide suction gas cooled motor with winding temperature limits and compressor overloads.

B. Provide each unit with manufacturer’s standard refrigerant circuit(s) factory-supplied completely piped with liquid line filter-drier, suction and liquid line pressure ports.

C. Provide hot gas reheat coil for dehumidification.

2.10 OUTDOOR AIR SECTION

A. Provide a fully integrated 100% modulating outside air economizer with unit return and barometric relief air dampers, minimum position setting, preset linkage, wiring harness with plug. Unit operation is through primary temperature controls that automatically modulate dampers to maintain space temperature conditions.

B. Provide adjustable minimum position control located in the economizer section of the unit.

C. Provide spring return motor for outside air damper closure during unit shutdown or power interruption.

2.11 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide microprocessor unit-mounted DDC control which when used with an electronic zone sensor provides proportional integral room control. This UCM shall perform all unit functions by making all heating, cooling, and ventilating decisions through resident software logic.

B. Provide factory-installed indoor evaporator defrost control to prevent compressor slugging by interrupting compressor operation.

C. Provide an anti-cycle timing and minimum on/off between stages timing in the microprocessor.

D. Economizer Preferred Cooling (if supplied with economizer) - Compressor operation is integrated with economizer cycle to allow mechanical cooling when economizer is not adequate to satisfy zone requirements. Compressors are enabled if space temperature is recovering to cooling setpoint at a rate of less than 0.2 degrees per minute. Compressor low ambient lockout overrides this function.

2.12 STAGING CONTROLS

A. Provide programmable electronic microcomputer based zone control. 1. Zone control shall incorporate:

a. Automatic changeover from heating to cooling. b. Set-up for at least 2 - sets of separate heating and cooling temperatures per day. c. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31

days. d. Switch selection features including Fahrenheit display, 12 or 24-hour clock,

keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.

06/21/2019



e. Smart Fan Operation: Allows the unit fan operation to default to the Auto Mode during unoccupied periods, regardless of the Fan switch position.

f. Economizer Minimum Position Override: Allows the unit controller to override and close the minimum position setting on the economizer damper during unoccupied time periods.

2. Zone sensor display shall be capable of: a. Time of day. b. Actual room temperature. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indication: heating, cooling, low battery, and fan on. h. Keyed, hinged and ventilated plastic cover

B. Provide remote temperature sensor capability.

C. Provide mixed air sensor for economizer control.

D. Provide return air sensor for economizer control.

E. Provide Freeze stat.

F. Provide Lon interface card to interface to building DDC system.

2.13 ROOF CURB

A. Contractor shall provide factory supplied insulated roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly.

B. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTU.

B. Examine roughing-in for RTU to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

06/21/2019



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install on roof structure, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories." Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain.

B. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with

union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.

C. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking

under entire roof curb. 3. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.

C. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing RTU and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test unit for

compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

06/21/2019



A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

B. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTU unit.


06/21/2019


DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER 238127 - 1

SECTION 23 81 27 - DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide packaged ductless split system air conditioner complete with fan, filters, electronic controls, and DX coil.

B. Provide matching air-cooled condensing unit complete with fan, coil, and compressor.


A. Standards: Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) and Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).

B. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label.

C. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

1.3 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sanyo, Carrier, Mitsubishi, or Daikin AC.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide a one year parts and labor warranty on the entire unit commencing at Project Completion. Provide a five-year warranty parts and labor warranty for compressors, commencing at Project Completion. Warranties commencing from the date of shipment or start-up are not sufficient.

1.5 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit shop drawings indicating components, assembly, dimensions, weights and loadings, required clearances, and location and size of field connections. Include schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling coils, refrigerant piping, wiring and electrical requirements and accessories required for complete system.

B. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1 submittals.

C. Contract Closeout Information 1. Operating and maintenance data 2. Parts list 3. Guarantee

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The air conditioning evaporator shall be a self-contained factory assembled unit. The system shall be designed for draw through air arrangement to insure even air distribution to the entire face area of the coil.

2.2 STANDARD FEATURES

A. Evaporator Fan Section: The evaporator unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, an emergency operation function and a test run switch. Evaporator unit and refrigerant pipes will be charged with dry air before shipment from the factory. The evaporator fan shall be an assembly with a turbo fan direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins on copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

B. Condensing Unit: The compressor shall be a high efficiency scroll design and shall operate with R410a. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted on the outside of the compressor. The condensing unit shall have an accumulator. The compressor will be equipped with an internal thermal overload. The condensing unit shall have high pressure and low pressure safety switches. The condensing unit must have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 50 feet and have refrigerant tubing length of 75 feet between evaporator and condensing units without the need for line size changes, traps, or additional oil. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. The condensing unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F outdoor ambient temperature.

C. Control: This unit shall have a wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. Refer to drawings for sequence of operation. The control system shall consist of two microprocessors interconnected by a single wiring cable. Wiring shall run direct from the indoor unit to the controller with no splices. Manufacturer shall provide 2 conductor 18 ga. stranded wire for connection to remote controller. The microprocessor located in the evaporator unit shall have the capability of sensing return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

06/21/2019



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install unit and piping as per manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Make wiring connections between remote control panel and unit mounted control devices and panel. Also make any other field wiring connection required for remote or duct mounted sensors.

C. Make all refrigerant-piping connections, fully charge unit and complete installation in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation instructions.


06/21/2019


ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 260010 - 1

SECTION 260010 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Descriptions 2. Quality Assurance 3. Record and Information Manuals 4. Examination of Site 5. Warranty 6. Definitions 7. Load Balancing 8. Scheduling 9. Coordination Between Trades 10. Coordination with Utility Companies 11. Owner Furnished Equipment 12. Materials and Equipment 13. Approved Equals 14. Manufacturer’s Declaration 15. Installation 16. Painting and Related Work 17. Cutting, Patching, and Openings 18. Tests 19. Temporary Power 20. Cleaning

B. This Section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28.

C. All applicable requirements of other portions of the Contract Documents apply to the work of all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28, including, but not limited to, Division 01, General Requirements.

1.2 DESCRIPTIONS

A. The Contractor shall provide the labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to complete and leave ready for operation all electrical systems as called for in these specifications or shown on the drawings and all details essential to complete the work. Items omitted from either the specifications or the drawings, but shown or described in the other trades, and all items necessary to make the electrical system complete and workable shall form a part of the work. No “extras” will be allowed.

B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor certifies that: 1. He is satisfied that he understands all site conditions that may have an effect on his bid

price.

06/21/2019



2. He fully understands the make-up, construction, and operation of all systems and equipment he is bidding on, and he has included in his price all materials, supplies, accessories, and services necessary to make these systems complete and operational.

C. Extent of Work: Work under this contract consists of furnishing, installing, testing, placing into operation, and guaranteeing complete electrical systems as shown on the drawings and as specified in Division 26, 27, & 28. The Contractor shall connect and place all wired equipment in proper working order. Refer to the plans and specifications for work included in this Contract. Some general guidelines to coordinating work between Division 26 and other Divisions are as follows: 1. Division 26 includes all power wiring and raceways for other Divisions' equipment.

Division 26 is responsible to furnish and install motor starters and disconnect switches for Division 21, 22 and Division 23 equipment, unless otherwise noted. Remote two wire control logic will be extended to the motor starters as work of other Divisions. Where combined line voltage power/control is used for Division 21, 22 or Division 23 equipment, the wiring and raceways are treated as power wiring and are work of Division 26.

2. Division 26 is responsible for providing appropriate wire and conduit between all distribution equipment and all electrical devices and utilization equipment shown on plans. It is also the responsibility of Division 26 to provide all wire, conduit, and devices necessary to accomplish all control functions as indicated by the control diagrams which are not specifically shown as work of another division.

D. Abbreviations used in these specifications: 1. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act 2. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 3. ASTM - ASTM International 4. CBM - Certified Ballast Manufacturers 5. EIA - Electronic Industries Association 6. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories 7. FCC - Federal Communications Commission 8. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association 9. IEC - International Electro Technical Commission 10. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society 11. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 12. ITL - Independent Testing Laboratories 13. NEC - National Electrical Code 14. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association 15. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 16. NESC - National Electrical Safety Code 17. UL - Underwriters Laboratories 18. A/E - Architect of Record or Engineer of Record


A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein. 1. All work shall be installed in full accordance with the latest edition of the National

Electrical Code (NEC) as prepared and published by the National Fire Protection

06/21/2019



Association (NFPA) and any applicable local or state codes. All electrical equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or any approved independent nationally recognized electrical testing laboratory where such standards exist. Optionally, in lieu of such listing and labeling, equipment preapproved by the Electrical Inspector may be supplied. Wherever UL compliance is mentioned in the specifications, the above alternatives shall be understood to apply to all listing and labeling requirements. This does not preempt or replace the specifications or replace the approval process. All service switches/circuit breakers shall be listed and labeled as outlined above for service entrance duty.

2. Comply with the requirements of NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations," the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) National Joint Guideline NJG-6 "Temporary Job Utilities and Services."

3. In addition to the requirements outlined under other sections of the Contract Documents, all Work, material, and equipment shall comply with all requirements of the latest editions and interim amendments of the National Electrical Safety Code, National Fire Protection Association, OSHA, the building Owner's insurance company, and all applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances. All materials shall be listed and labeled by UL and installed as required by the listing.

4. Should any changes in the Drawings or the Project Manual be required to conform to the above regulations, the Contractor shall notify the A/E at the time of submitting his bid. After entering into the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Contractor shall be held to complete all Work necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.

B. Permits and Regulations 1. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required by laws, ordinances,

rules, regulations, and public authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall obtain certificates of such inspections and shall submit same to the A/E. The A/E, Contractor shall pay all fees, charges, and expenses in connection therewith. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection from the proper authority prior to final payment. Obtain and pay for easements required to bring temporary utilities to the site, where the Owner's easement cannot be utilized for that purpose.

2. The Contractor shall not allow or cause any of the Work to be covered up or enclosed until the A/E or Owner has been notified and given reasonable opportunity (2 working days) to review the Work. When required by law or regulations, the governmental agency having jurisdiction for inspections shall be given reasonable notice and opportunity to inspect the Work. Any Work that is enclosed or covered up before such inspection and test shall be uncovered at the Contractor's expense; after it has been inspected, the Contractor shall restore the Work to its original condition at his own expense.

C. Interpretation of Drawings and Project Manual 1. Any discrepancies between Drawings, Project Manual, Drawings and Project Manual, or

within Drawings and Project Manual shall be promptly brought to the attention of the A/E for clarification during the bidding period. No allowance shall subsequently be made to the Contractor by reason of his failure to have brought said discrepancies to the attention of the A/E during the bidding period or of any error on the Contractor's part.

2. The locations of switch, receptacle, light, motor, outlets, etc. shown on Drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall use good judgment in placing the preceding to

06/21/2019



eliminate all interference with ducts, piping, etc. Where any doubt exists, the exact location shall be determined by the A/E.

3. Check all door swings so that light switches are not located behind doors. Relocate switches as required, with A/E's review.

4. All general trades and mechanical Drawings shall be checked by the Contractor before installing any outlets, power wiring, etc.

5. Equipment sizes and locations shown on the Drawings are estimated. Before installing any wire or conduit, the Contractor shall obtain the exact equipment requirements, including wire and conduit entrance locations, and install wire, conduit, disconnect switches, motor starters, overload heaters, circuit breakers, or other items of the correct size and locations for the equipment actually installed. However, wire and conduit sizes shown on the Drawings shall be taken as a minimum and shall not be reduced without written approval from the A/E.

6. The Contractor shall provide all wiring, including disconnect switches and starters for all electrically operated equipment shown on Drawings, specified or required, except that starters and/or disconnect switches need not be furnished where it is specifically noted that they are furnished with the equipment.

7. The Drawings show the general arrangement required for installation of equipment and materials. The Contractor shall follow these Drawings as closely as possible. Should conditions necessitate other arrangements, the Contractor shall prepare and submit drawings showing the changes to the A/E for review before proceeding with the Work.

8. The A/E reserves the right to make minor changes in the location of the installation of equipment and materials up to the time of roughing in at no extra cost to the Owner.

9. The Drawings, do not show all offsets and do not detail every point at which unusual conditions of construction may require special attention. All additional fittings, conduits or specialties and other appurtenances necessary due to field conditions shall be provided by the Contractor.

10. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices as are required to complete the installations.

11. Wherever in Division 26, 27, & 28 a Manufacturer is specified with the notation "or approved equal" or "A/E approved", the decision as to the material or equipment being "equal" shall be made by the A/E without exception and this decision shall be accepted by the Contractor as final. Where the Contractor proposes to furnish equipment or material in accordance with the "or approved equal" notation said equipment or materials shall be submitted to the A/E, for review.

1.4 RECORD AND INFORMATION MANUALS

A. Record drawings 1. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section

"Project Closeout." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for: a. Raceway systems, size, contents, and location, for both exterior and interior;

locations of all concealed utilities; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

b. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

c. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

06/21/2019



d. Any deviations made necessary to incorporate equipment different from the Design Base equipment.

e. At completion of the project, contractor shall deliver record drawings to the A/E. 2. The Record drawings must be kept current and accurate, and may be reviewed at any

time by the A/E or Owner.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 1. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "Project Closeout."

Compile and assemble the operation and maintenance data of equipment specified in Division 26 into a separate set of vinyl covered three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference. Data shall clearly indicate all options and accessories.

2. The following items, together with any other necessary pertinent data, shall be included in each Manual: a. Each manual shall be labeled on front cover with project name, Contract,

Contractor's name, A/E, and date of project completion. b. Manufacturers' names, nearest Factory Representative, and model and serial

numbers of components of systems c. Operating instructions, start-up and shut-down procedures d. Maintenance instructions. e. Routine and 24-hour emergency service/repair information: f. Name, address and telephone number of servicing agency g. Names of personnel to be contacted for service arrangements h. Parts list with numbers of replaceable items, including sources of supply i. Manufacturers' literature describing each piece of equipment j. One approved copy of each submittal k. Written warranties l. Certificate of Material Receipt and Certificate of System Completion m. One typewritten directory for each panelboard as installed n. Record (as-built) drawings o. Certificate of Final Inspection signed by Building Authority having jurisdiction p. Test Results q. Coordination analysis (see "Power System Coordination Analysis") r. Video tapes of all equipment demonstrations and training sessions.

3. In addition to the requirements listed above and specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items: a. Manufacturers' Descriptive Literature b. Final Signed Submittal Copy of Shop Drawings c. Spare Parts and Replacement Parts Lists d. Manufacturers' Maintenance and Service Manuals e. Project-Specific Description of Operation f. Wiring Diagrams g. Motor list including motor description, motor horsepower, motor voltage, fuse

size, fuse type, and overload size. h. Fuse list including fuse location, fuse size, fuse type, and load description. i. Fixture Ballast Schedule j. Lamp Schedule

4. Materials for more than one item shall clearly indicate which item or items are included on the Project.

5. Shop Drawings which are folded and punched for insertion in the Manual shall be such that the Drawings can be unfolded without removing them from the Manual, and all information shall be legible.

06/21/2019



1.5 EXAMINATION OF SITE

A. Certain existing conditions may affect the manner or sequence of the performance of work. Review existing services and structures prior to bidding the work. Review operating schedules for existing systems and services. Coordinate the scheduling of the work with existing operations.

B. The contractor is encouraged to visit the site of the proposed project. After the contract is signed, no allowance will be made for lack of knowledge of the project conditions.

C. Verify and reconcile work required by the contract documents with conditions at the site prior to bid.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 26 into a separate set of vinyl covered three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

B. Provide complete warranty information for each item. Information to include: 1. Product or equipment list. 2. Date of beginning of warranty or bond. 3. Duration of warranty or bond. 4. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining

warranty services.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Areas: In general, areas with carpet or tile floors, lay-in or fixed ceiling tile, special architectural ceiling treatment, or tiled, plastered, or paneled walls shall be considered finished areas.

B. Interior: For the purposes of this specification, interior is any area within the boundaries of the foundation of any building within the superstructure or other structures not classified as a building.

C. Concealed: Embedded in or installed behind walls, within partitions, above suspended ceilings, below grade, in trenches, in tunnels and in crawl spaces.

D. Exposed: Not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above

E. Provide: To furnish and install (complete, tested, and ready for operation).

F. Furnish: To purchase and deliver products to the project site and make ready for installation.

G. Install: To take furnished products, assemble, erect, secure, connect, and place into operation.

H. Products: Includes materials, systems and equipment.

I. Work: The providing of products for entire contract.

06/21/2019



1.8 LOAD BALANCING

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to balance the loads on the service system, all distribution systems, and all power equipment so that the variation in amperes per phase readings shall not exceed 5% under normal operating conditions.

B. Special care shall be taken during load balancing to prevent reverse rotation of motors.

C. If, during load balancing, a load is shifted from one phase to another in a color coded system, the Contractor shall paint or tape the ends of the wire at all outlet points with the proper color code for that phase. Failure to do so shall constitute justifiable grounds to require the Contractor to replace the entire circuit with the proper coded wire at no expense to the A/E or Owner.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. General: It is mandatory that the facility be maintained in operation during construction and that periods of shutdown due to line changeovers, etc. are held to a minimum. These outages must be scheduled with and have the concurrence of the A/E and Owner. Further, it is mandatory that the completion of various stages of the electrical work coincide with the other phases of construction to maintain and permit operation of new installations as construction progresses.

1.10 COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

A. General 1. Coordinate all requirements of the Work of this Division with other Trade Contractors.

Such requirements include, but are not limited to, locations, sizes, anchors, and similar items.

2. Provide all necessary information to other Trade Contractors for such coordination. Such information shall include conforming Shop Drawings, conforming Product Data, and all other required data.

3. This Contractor shall bear all costs for providing affected Work of related Trade Contractor(s) with no change to the Contract Sum or Date of Substantial Completion.

4. This Contractor shall coordinate all of his/her work with the General Trades Contractor for location of all devices, fixtures and equipment prior to rough-in.

B. Mechanical/Electrical Coordination 1. Plumbing, Fire Protection, HVAC, and Electrical Contractors shall coordinate their

rough-in, service, and control requirements with each other. Electrical Contractor shall review all control drawings to coordinate exact number and locations of temperature control panels as well as to provide proper starters (including necessary time delays, auxiliary contacts, etc.).

2. All wiring required to power Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC equipment shall be installed by the Electrical Contractor, including 120 volt to temperature control panels. All control and interlock wiring, regardless of voltage, is by the Contractor furnishing the control panel. The Division 28 Contractor shall be responsible for the wiring from the fire alarm control panel to the control device.

06/21/2019



3. All electrical devices furnished as a part of Division 23 equipment, and installation requirements of all electrical work done by Division 23 Contractors shall conform to the applicable sections of Division 26.

4. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate with other Contractors prior to installation of switchboards and panelboards to insure requirements of NEC Articles 110 and 408 are met. The Contractor violating this requirement shall be responsible for the cost of all modifications required to comply to the satisfaction of the inspection agency for failure to meet the above code requirements.

5. If motors and/or equipment are furnished by other Divisions, which require larger starters, safety switches, circuit breakers, fuses, and/or branch circuit conductors than indicated, due to a larger size than specified, the Contractor furnishing the motors shall reimburse the Electrical Contractor for any cost differential.

6. Final operation of equipment provided under other Divisions shall be the responsibility of the other Divisions Contractor.

C. Foundations, Bases, Curbs, and Supports 1. Provide and coordinate all requirements for foundations, bases, curbs, and supports with

the related Trade Contractor(s). 2. Provide required dimensions, templates, and all required information on anchors, sleeves,

and cast-in-place accessories, including dimensions, to the related Trade Contractor(s).

D. Openings, Recesses, and Chases 1. Coordinate all requirements and locations for openings, recesses, and chases with the

related Trade Contractor(s).

E. Final Connections 1. Coordinate with the related Trade Contractor(s) all requirements for rough-in and final

connections for equipment installed under this Division.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH UTILITY COMPANIES

A. Description 1. The Division 26 contractor shall:

a. Coordinate division of responsibility with the utility companies serving the building.

b. Provide, furnish or install materials and labor not provided, furnished or installed by the utility companies.

c. Provide an allowance in the bid for utility aid-to-construction cost as follows: i. Electric: $xxxxx.xx

ii. Telecom: $xxxxx.xx iii. Cable: $xxxxx.xx

B. Division of work-electric power utility 1. In general, the power company will do the following:

a. Provide standard riser b. Provide primary cable c. Provide load break connectors d. Provide Terminators e. Provide grounding f. Provide security padlock

06/21/2019



g. Provide meter h. Furnish meter trim i. Furnish metering transformers j. Provide meter wire from metering transformer to meter k. Provide transformer primary l. Provide terminal pole and framing

2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following:

a. Provide sleeve for grounding rod b. Install meter trim c. Provide conduit for meter wiring from transformer to meter trim d. Provide guard post e. Furnish easement or right-of-way f. Provide concrete pad g. Provide trenching h. Provide primary duct i. Provide secondary duct j. Provide secondary conductors and lugs k. Provide pulling wire, string, or rope, in duct

C. Division of work-Telephone utility 1. In general, the telephone company is responsible for all service cable work, including

furnishing and installing main service copper, fiber and coax cables to the building. 2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following:

a. Providing trenching and backfill for telecommunications service conduits. b. Furnishing and installing telecommunications service conduits. c. Provide a minimum of a #6 solid copper ground wire from main building ground

to telecommunication plywood backboard location. Provide the service entrance plywood backboard and a 120volt GFCI with TVSS double duplex receptacle.

D. Division of work- – CATV and High Speed Data utility 1. In general, the Cable TV & High Speed Data internet utility company is responsible for

all service cable work, including furnishing and installing main service, fiber and coax cables to the building.

2. The electrical contractor is responsible for all other work, including the following: a. Providing trenching and backfill for cable and internet communications service

conduits. b. Furnishing and installing cable and internet service conduits. c. Provide a minimum of a #6 solid copper ground wire from main building ground

to telecommunication plywood backboard location. Provide the service entrance plywood backboard and 120volt GFCI with TVSS double duplex receptacle.

1.12 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for the Owner furnished equipment.

B. The Contractor shall remove, receive, store, uncrate, protect, and install the equipment in place, complete with field connections between shipping splits, feeder connections, and all appurtenances required to place the equipment in operation, ready for use. The Contractor shall be responsible for the equipment when received, as if he had purchased the equipment himself.

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. New material and equipment; all bearing manufacturer’s name, model number, or other identification marking.

B. Provide standard product; latest design with published properties of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of specified material or equipment for minimum 5 years (unless exempted by A/E).

C. Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated, equipment of same type in same room must match as to color, finish, and design.

D. Unless otherwise submitted to and approved by A/E, equipment and its devices must be of same manufacturer; or devices must be approved and warranted by equipment manufacturer.

E. Whenever the Contractor furnishes equipment or material other than the Design Base Manufacturer specified, the Contractor is responsible for the cost and coordination of all modifications required not only for his work, but also for the work of all other Trades affected. Where changes to other Trades’ work are required, this Contractor must include the additional costs of all such work in his bid and ultimately make arrangements with these other Trades for such changes and compensate them accordingly. Where changes to design are required, the Contractor shall submit such changes to the A/E for approval. The Contractor shall investigate potential conflicts such as the following: 1. Provide Physical dimensions and weights 2. Code required working clearances 3. Connecting pipe sizes 4. Additional control and interlock wiring 5. Lug size and quantity 6. Increased wire size, fuse size, and motor control equipment size 7. Increased ventilation requirements 8. Battery capacity 9. Sound levels of audible devices 10. Increased withstand and interrupting ratings of downstream equipment due to differences

in over-current protective device characteristics

2.2 APPROVED EQUALS

A. Equal (equivalent) components (articles, devices, materials, forms of construction, fixtures, etc.) by manufacturers not listed but meeting the specifications may be submitted to the A/E for approval and subsequent inclusion into the bidding documents. Submission must be received no later than 10 working days before bid date. If approved, such manufacturers will be listed in an addendum.

B. Submittals must include all of the following: 1. Cover Letter: Company letterhead; addressed to A/E. Indicate the following

a. Project name, project number, and phase or bid package if applicable b. Specification Section by number and title

06/21/2019



c. Specified Product d. Proposed Product e. Deviations, if any, from Specified Product f. List of attachments

2. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature, fully describing proposed product with exact item highlighted or clearly indicated.

3. Specifications: Manufacturer’s specifications with all modifications noted as required to show compliance with Bidding Documents.

4. Test Data: Where performance requirements are specified, submit laboratory tests to indicate compliance.

5. Samples: Submit appropriate samples of proposed product when required by A/E, showing color, texture, construction and other attributes necessary for evaluation.

2.3 MANUFACTURER’S DECLARATION

A. Submit a list of the suppliers of Major Equipment to be used on this project. This shall be submitted with the bid. This list shall be typed on company letterhead and shall list the project title. The manufacturer and catalog number/type shall be listed adjacent to each specification section number and product description.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Rough-In 1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of

the actual equipment to be connected. 2. Refer to equipment specifications in other Divisions for rough-in requirements.

B. Electrical Installations 1. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,

materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: a. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. b. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. c. Coordinate and provide chases, slots, and openings in other building components

during progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. d. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured in place concrete or supported from or on other structural components, as they are constructed.

e. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building and equipment which must be placed in service before further construction can take place.

f. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

g. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing

06/21/2019



regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service and place each in proper operating order.

h. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that the work is shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the A/E before final placement.

i. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

j. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

k. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

3.2 PAINTING AND RELATED WORK

A. Finish painting in areas of new construction is the responsibility of the General Trades Contractor and is specified in Division 9.

B. Any other painting, required by Sections in Division 26, is the responsibility of the respective Division 26 Contractor. It shall meet the requirements of Division 9. Each Contractor is responsible for repainting of finished areas disturbed by his own cutting and patching.

C. Factory-finished equipment which has rusted or has been damaged shall be cleaned, spot primed with zinc chromate, and finished to the original quality and color by the Contractor.

D. Support steel shall be cleaned, rust removed, primed, and painted.

3.3 CUTTING, PATCHING AND OPENINGS

A. Unless otherwise required in General or Special Conditions, Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for his own work. Work must be accomplished in a neat and workmanlike manner, acceptable to the A/E.

B. If necessary to cut into work of other Trades, it shall be done by other Trades at this Contractor’s expense. Patching shall be similarly executed.

C. Cutting, burning or drilling of structural support beams, joists, plates, or other structural members is strictly prohibited without the specific written consent of the A/E. Use rotary drills where cutting holes through concrete, brick, plaster, or tile is necessary. Obtain approval of the A/E before proceeding with work.

D. The General Trades Contractor shall locate and size openings for conduit, bus-way or other items prior to construction.

E. All cutting and patching shall be done promptly and all repairs shall be made as necessary to leave the entire work in good condition, including all cutting, fitting, and drilling of masonry,

06/21/2019



concrete, metal, wood, plaster, and other materials as specified or required for proper assembly, fabrication, installation, and completion of all work of the Contract.

F. Patching shall match adjacent materials and shall be accomplished only by trades men skilled in the respective craft required. Materials and equipment used in the patching work shall comply with requirements of those Sections of the Specification relating to material to be used in new construction.

G. Electrical provides: 1. All opening and hole information through floors, walls, and roofs for his work; Including

all pipe and conduit, inserts, hangers, and plates. 2. Exact information to other contractors as to size, depth, and location of such openings

before construction is in place; and delivery and setting in place of all boxes, sleeves, inserts, and forms for his work in time for installation in all locations.

3. All cutting, patching and restoration to accommodate Electrical contractor’s failure to provide specified date in time for openings to be left or to accommodate boxes, sleeves, inserts, and forms after construction has been Completed by other contractors.

4. Skilled craftsmen to cut, patch, rebuild, restore, replace, refinish and repaint new construction cut, disturbed, or marred by him to original or new condition; for installation of new, exposed, concealed, underground, or underfloor work of all kinds; for admission of new work and equipment; for installation of new equipment and new work in new construction; for complete restoration of pipe, duct, or equipment covering disturbed or marred by his personnel.

3.4 TESTS

A. The Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction may require portions of the work to be inspected, tested, or approved. These services shall be performed by approved agencies.

B. The A/E must be notified of all scheduled tests and adjustments at least 48 hours before they are scheduled so that he may witness same. If the Contractor performs any test or adjustment without the A/E present, or without proper notification, the Contractor may be required to perform the test or adjustment a second time. All schedules are to be coordinated with the A/E and Owner far enough in advance so-as to minimize inconvenience.

C. Tests shall include: 1. Proper operation of lights and equipment. 2. Continuity of conduit system. 3. Insulation leakage and impedances. 4. Ground system resistance. 5. Any sub-system tests described in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Record line voltage at service entrance equipment with all systems operating.

D. Provide a signed statement that all tests have been performed and have met all requirements as described in other Sections. This signed statement shall be incorporated into the Record and Information Manual.

E. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests, or approvals.

06/21/2019



3.5 CLEANING

A. Upon completion of work, all materials and equipment furnished in this contract shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, rust, and oil. Prepare for finish painting, where painting is specified.


06/21/2019


SUBMITTALS 260015 - 1

SECTION 260015 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting shop drawings, product data, color samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. This section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27 and 28.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written information that requires the Engineer’s responsive action. Materials and equipment submitted shall meet all the requirements of the Contract Documents. No materials or equipment shall be ordered until the submittal has been reviewed and processed as “Reviewed for Compliance” or “Conform as Noted” by the Contractor, Architect, and Engineer.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require the A/E’s review. Information is submitted for record purposes only and will not be reviewed by the A/E. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to make sure materials and equipment comply with the Contract Documents prior to ordering. If reviewed however, the submittals may be rejected for non-compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Reviewed for Compliance: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal was found to generally conform with the design concept and Contract Documents.

D. Conform as Noted: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal was found to generally conform with the design concept and Contract Documents with the exception of the items noted. The items noted by the Engineer must be changed and/or included, however, the submittal should not be resubmitted.

E. Revise and Resubmit: The submittal was reviewed for compliance by the Engineer and the submittal did not conform with the design concept and Contract Documents. The items noted by the Engineer must be changed or included and the submittal must be resubmitted.

F. Does Not Conform: The submittal was not reviewed because it is incomplete, inadequate for review, or does not meet the submittal requirements listed in the ‘Quality Assurance’ section below. The Contractor shall review the submittal requirements and resubmit.


A. The review of shop drawings by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from his/her responsibility to comply with the project documents nor does it authorize any additional cost. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for confirming and correlating all

06/21/2019



quantities, dimensions and weights, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, for performing his/her work in a safe manner and for all coordination of the work with all trades.

B. Contractor assumes complete responsibility for changes required and contract delays, including that of other trades, as a result of his/her chosen materials and equipment.

C. All submittals shall bear the Contractor’s certification that he/she has reviewed, checked, and approved the submittal, that they have been coordinated with the requirements of the project and the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the he/she has verified all field measurements and construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. Submittals without a Contractor’s approval will not be reviewed, will not be returned, and the Contractor will be notified.

D. Submittals shall identify the manufacturer, specific model number, performance data, electrical characteristics, overall size, features, specified options, wiring diagrams, and any other information necessary to determine if the product or equipment conforms with the contract documents. Contractor shall submit only material applicable for the project, where catalog pages are submitted the contractor shall identify the specific items that apply. Additional equipment specific requirements may be listed in other spec sections.

E. Submittals shall include the complete package of equipment materials, piping, and insulation pertaining to that piece of equipment. A package of equipment requiring long lead times should be submitted as early as possible.

F. Where other specification sections require field quality control reports to be prepared by a Qualified Testing Agency, submit testing agency qualification as part of the Informational Submittals. Testing Agency shall be a member company of NETA or an NRTL.

G. All submittals must be issued individually by specification section.

H. Submittals which do not conform with the requirements above WILL NOT BE REVIEWED; they will be returned to the Contractor marked “Does Not Conform”.

1.4 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Electronic copies of the Contract Documents are available from the A/E for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Contractor shall submit electronic copies of all shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic submittals shall be emailed to [email protected] and the AEC Project Manager. Other means of file transmission such as FTP or other file format types shall be mutually agreed upon.

C. Contractor shall prepare a title page for each submittal containing the following information: 1. Indicate name of firm and individual with contact information for entity that prepared

each submittal. 2. Project name as listed on contract. 3. Specification section number and title. 4. Material or Equipment specified. 5. Date.

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS REQUIRED

A. Submit information for all equipment described in the specifications and on the drawings.

2.2 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment specific information submittals are listed within equipment specification sections. General information submittal requirements are listed below. Information submittals shall be provided when indicated within equipment specifications sections.

1. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency 2. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for equipment, accessories, and components,

from manufacturer. 3. Source quality-control reports. 4. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide all information in bound 3-ring binder as well as digital format. Include the following information:

1. All approved shop drawings. 2. All information submittal information. 3. Contractor’s warranty and any specific equipment warranty provided by equipment

manufacturers. 4. Inspection certificates. 5. Routine maintenance requirements and maintenance intervals for installed components as

well as the name and address of qualified service agencies for all major equipment. 6. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting equipment. 7. Spare parts list.

B. Project close-out material: Provide as described in Division 01.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Notify the A/E in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor must boldly note all deviations on the submittal.

B. Make submittals promptly in accordance with the approved schedule and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work of the Contractor or any other Contractor.

06/21/2019



C. Correct or change and then resubmit rejected submittals as required until approved. The Contractor must clearly note all revisions on resubmitted submittals. Resubmittals without the revisions noted may be returned without review.

D. Do not begin fabrication or work that requires an Action Submittal until submittal is processed as “Reviewed for Compliance” or “Conform as Noted” by the A/E.


06/21/2019


BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260020 - 1

SECTION 260020 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes: 1. Sleeves 2. Seals

a. Watertight Seals b. Fire Rated Seals

3. Firestops 4. Access Panels 5. Coordination Drawings

B. This Section applies to all sections of Division 26, 27, and 28.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's product data sheets indicating product characteristics, performance and

limiting criteria 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction for each type of seal or firestop required by the

project 3. Written certification that firestopping systems meet firestopping requirements specified

herein 4. Concrete compression testing reports


A. Codes and Standards: Perform all work associated with basic electrical materials in compliance with applicable requirements of governing agencies having jurisdiction and in accordance with these plans and as specified herein. Where provisions of the pertinent codes and standards conflict with this specification, the more stringent provision shall govern. 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) "Specifications for the Design,

Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." 2. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 3. National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

06/21/2019



B. Field verify and coordinate with the General Trades Contractor all locations and dimensions to ensure that the equipment will be properly located, readily accessible, grouped with other trades equipment as needed, and installed in accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the contract documents, and the referenced standards.

C. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and where cutting, drilling, etc., of floors, walls, ceilings, or other surfaces is necessary for the proper installation, this work shall be carefully done, and any damage to building, piping, or equipment shall be repaired by skilled mechanics of the trades involved at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. In the event any discrepancies are discovered, immediately notify the A/E in writing. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Seals

a. Link-Seal by Thunderline Corporation b. CSD Sealing Systems c. O-Z/Gedney Inc. d. Crouse Hinds e. Appleton

2. Firestopping Materials a. Hilti b. Tremco Sealants & Coatings c. 3M Fire Protection Products d. Dow Corning e. CSD Sealing Systems f. Insta-Foam Products, Inc. g. The Carborundum Co.

3. Access Panels a. Milcor b. Zurn c. Larsen’s d. Acudor e. JL f. Nystrom g. Karp

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Sleeve material through floors and walls shall be machine cut rigid galvanized steel conduit.

06/21/2019



B. Sleeves installed in new construction shall have welded flange at mid-point of sleeve which functions as a water barrier and anchor collar.

C. At the contractor’s option, steel wall sleeves by Link-Seal may be provided.

2.3 SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type 1. Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the

annular space between conduit and sleeve. 2. Seal assembly shall have steel bolts and nuts and rubber sealing element for service and

environment under which assembly will be used. Seal shall have a pressure resistance rating of 20 psig.

B. Sealing plug type 1. Seals shall consist of two identical piece plugs made of synthetic rubber with one edge

flanged, serrated profile on the outside and a series of ridges on the inside which compress and assures a tight seal. Seal shall have a pressure resistance of 15 psig at the plug base and 30 psig at the flange. Rubber grade shall be suitable for the service and environment under which sealing plug will be used.

2.4 WATERTIGHT SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type watertight seals shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with EPDM rubber sealing element. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Type C.

B. Sealing plug type watertight seals shall be made of EPDM rubber. Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.5 FIRE RATED SEALS

A. Modular mechanical type fire seal shall have zinc galvanized bolts and nuts with silicone rubber sealing element which provides a three hour fire resistance rating. Seals shall be Link-Seal, Pyro-Pac, model FS.

B. Sealing plug type fire rated seals shall be made of FRR rubber for three hour fire resistance rating, Seals shall be by CSD Sealing Systems.

2.6 FIRESTOPS

A. General 1. Use only firestop products that have been UL 1479, ASTM E-814 tested for specific fire

rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type, annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

2. Cast-in-place firestop devices are installed prior to concrete placement for use with non-combustible and combustible plastic pipe (closed and open piping systems), or electrical cable bundles, penetrating concrete floors.

06/21/2019



3. Sealants, foams or caulking materials for use with non-combustible items including rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

4. Intumescent sealants, caulking materials for use with combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat and flame) including PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe.

5. Foams, intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.

6. Non-curing, re-penetrable intumescent sealants, caulking or putty materials for use with flexible cable or cable bundles.

7. Wall opening protective materials for use with U.L. listed metallic and specified nonmetallic outlet boxes.

8. Materials used for complex penetrations shall be made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

9. Non-curing, re-penetrable materials used for large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways.

10. Firestopping materials shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T) Ratings as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E-814 or UL1479 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. a. The F rating shall be a minimum of one (1) hour, but not less than the fire

resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. b. Conduct the fire test with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches

of water column.

2.7 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish ceiling and wall access panels as necessary for access to pull boxes, junction boxes, remote ballasts, electrical equipment, etc., requiring service, adjustment or maintenance.

B. Access panels are to be turned over to the General Trades Contractor for installation.

C. Ceiling Access Panels 1. Drywall Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door

panel, double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with ceiling.

2. Fire-Rated Ceiling: 24” x 24”, Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 16 gauge steel frame with 18 gauge recessed door panel, 20 gauge panel sides and 26 gauge panel hat channel, continuous hinge, self-latching cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.

3. Plaster Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style AP with finish material same as ceiling material or Style K, 16 gauge galvanized steel frame with 18 gauge galvanized steel door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painting for finish painting to match ceiling.

4. Acoustical Concealed Spline Ceilings: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style AT, 16 gauge steel frame with an 18-gauge steel recessed door panel. 24" x 24" and larger panels shall be reinforced, continuous hinge, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting.

D. Wall Access Panels

06/21/2019



1. Drywall: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style DW, 16 gauge steel frame with 14-gauge door panel, double acting concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.

2. Masonry and Tile: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style M Standard, 14 gauge steel frame and door panel, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall or Style M stainless.

3. Fire-Rated: 24” x 24”, Milcor fire-rated access door, UL approved, 1-1/2 hour, Class B rating, 16 gauge steel frame, 20 gauge insulated door panel continuous hinge, automatic door closer, cylinder lock, interior release mechanism, prime painted for finish painting with wall.

4. Plaster: 24” x 24”, Milcor Style K, 16 gauge steel frame with 14 gauge door panel and 22 gauge galvanized casing beads, concealed spring hinges, cylinder lock, prime painted for finish painting with wall.

2.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access panels. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Engineer indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of

06/21/2019



visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures, duct work, piping, and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. All penetrations through Fire-rated enclosures.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. Include proposed elevation of conduits and raceways.

b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. Include elevation of fixtures and devices.

c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations.

d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Include mounting elevations.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

b. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

c. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

d. All penetrations through Fire-rated enclosures.

9. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Engineer will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

06/21/2019



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Sleeves 1. Furnish and install sleeves for all penetrations through masonry and concrete

construction, smoke or fire rated separations, and equipment room walls and floors. 2. Carefully coordinate and check locations of sleeves immediately before and after each

concrete pour and masonry installation. 3. Give the General Trades Contractor locations and sizes of all openings required for the

installation of sleeves before construction of masonry or concrete walls is started. If it becomes necessary to cut into new work because of the failure of this Contractor to notify the General Trades Contractor, then the General Trades Contractor shall do any necessary cutting and patching required at this Contractor's expense.

4. Cut sleeves through walls flush with each surface. Unused sleeves shall extend beyond wall surface, filled with and surrounded by fire barrier materials, and be provided with caps.

5. Cut sleeves 2 inches above finished floors and 3 inches above floors in equipment rooms and shafts. Bottom of sleeve to be cut flush.

6. Core drill holes for sleeves in existing construction. 7. Patching shall be by the General Trades Contractor at this Contractor's expense. 8. Sleeves must be installed plumb with respect to wall. 9. Pack the space between sleeves and conduits or cables with approved fire barrier sealant

to maintain fire rating of structure. Fill space around all sleeves leading into exposed areas with material compatible with adjacent construction and finish or fire barrier sealant material to maintain fire rating of the structure.

B. Seals and Firestops 1. Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt, oil, loose materials and other foreign materials

which may affect the proper bond or installation of seals and firestops. 2. Do not apply seals and firestops to surfaces previously painted or treated with a sealer

curing compound or similar product. Remove coatings as required in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide primers, as required, which conform to manufacturer's recommendations for various substrates and conditions.

3. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for installation of seals and firestops. 4. Install firestops with sufficient pressure to fill seal holes, voids and openings to ensure an

effective smoke seal and to maintain the fire resistance rating of the assembly. 5. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces. Remove excess firestop material promptly as work

progresses and upon completion. 6. Unused sleeves shall be filled with and surrounded by firestop material. Sleeve ends

shall be capped. Blind sealing plugs may be used at Contractor's option. 7. Install watertight seals for all below grade penetrations of conduit into the building. 8. Install fire rated seals in all fire rated walls and floors. 9. Install oil resistant service seals in environment where oils, fuels, solvents and other

petroleum - base products are used. 10. Install corrosive service seals in environments where organic materials, acids, alkalis and

related chemicals are used.

C. Access Panels 1. Coordinate locations and installation of panels required to permit convenient access to

electrical equipment requiring adjustment, service or maintenance. Mark locations of access panels on Record Drawings

06/21/2019




A. Examine seals and firestops to ensure proper installation and full compliance with this specification. Work shall be accessible until inspection and approval by the applicable code authorities.

B. Correct unacceptable seals and firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this specification at no additional cost to the owner.


06/21/2019


ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 260025 - 1

SECTION 260025 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to: 1. The removal of all items of existing construction not to remain as a part of the final

Project. a. Remove all existing electrical equipment, wiring, and conduit in the areas to be

remodeled, in this Project, unless noted otherwise. b. Existing equipment serving other areas, but interfering with the construction, shall

be relocated as directed by the A/E or Owner. 2. Any demolition indicated on the Drawings is shown in general to indicate the extent of

demolition and is not to be considered as a record drawing of existing conditions. Accordingly, the Contractor shall be responsible for complete demolition of the electrical work indicated including any buried items or any existing items not shown on the Drawings. Before demolition and before submission of proposed methods and operations, the Contractor shall be responsible to obtain for reference any existing record drawings to determine the nature of the existing electrical work to be demolished.

3. Protect existing Work remaining in place. 4. Protect the public. 5. Repair and restore to original condition all items or portions of electrical work which are

not noted to be demolished but are damaged by Work under this Contract. 6. In existing areas not otherwise being remodeled but requiring new mechanical or

electrical services or new services passing through, coordinate for cutting, patching, removal and replacement of ceilings, walls, floors and/or slabs with the trade requiring access.

7. Coordinate electrical demolition with all other trades.

B. Sustainability Compliance 1. Refer to Section 26 00 10, Electrical General Requirements, for sustainability compliance

requirements for this project that impact products furnished under this specification section.

C. Seismic Compliance 1. Refer to Section 26 00 10, Electrical General Requirements, for seismic compliance

requirements for this project that impact products furnished under this specification section.

1.2 EQUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Delegated Design: Design Professional Qualifications and Quality Control Procedures 1. Design QAQC Plan 2. Design Professional Qualifications

a. Quality Control Reviewers Qualifications/Certifications

06/21/2019




A. General 1. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of structures and electrical

work to be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by

the Owner in so far as practicable. However, variations within the structure may occur by Owner’s removal and salvage operations prior to the start of the Demolition Work.

3. Items of salvable value to the Contractor may be removed as the Work progresses. Salvages items must be transported from the Site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the Site will not be permitted.

B. Explosives 1. The use of explosives will not be permitted.

C. Protection 1. Conduct demolition and removal of debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,

streets, walks, and other facilities. 2. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks or other facilities without permission from the

governing authority. Provide alternate routes around obstructed traffic ways as required by governing regulations.

3. Ensure safe passage of persons around the area of demolition. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent property and persons.

4. Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities at no cost to the Owner.

D. Utilities 1. Shut-off active utilities

a. Where existing electrical service is to be permanently abandoned, shut-off and cap or arrange with proper utility company for shut-off.

b. Where existing electrical services are to be rerouted, or reused in new Work, shut-off, cut and install temporary switches to minimize future shut down periods.

2. Existing utilities to remain: Maintain in service and protect against damage. 3. Existing electrical services to be rerouted: Where electrical services remaining in service

interfere with demolition or future construction, shut-off, disconnect, remove, relocate and reconnect as shown or required.

4. Shut-down periods: a. Arrange timing of shut-down periods of all in-service utilities with the Owner. Do

not shut-down any utility without prior written approval. b. Keep shut-down period to a minimum or use intermittent period as directed. Shut-

down periods may require premium time Contractor work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SALVAGABLE ITEMS REMOVED BY OWNER

A. Coordinate with Owner's representative all items to be salvaged and store on site as directed. All other items shall be removed from project site and disposed of.

06/21/2019



2.2 SALVABLE ITEMS REMOVED BY CONTRACTOR

A. All lighting fixtures, lamps and materials or equipment of significant value removed shall be turned over to the Owner. All other materials, such as conduit, boxes, wire, etc., shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site

2.3 NON-SALVABLE MATERIAL AND FILL

A. All other materials, equipment, fixtures, and debris become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the Site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE

A. Coordinate and sequence demolition so as not to cause shutdown of Owner operation. 1. Do not proceed with demolition without written authority to proceed signed by the

Owner.

B. Proceed with demolition in a systematic manner and coordinate with all trades involved.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other approved methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 1. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,

flooding, pollution and electrical shock. 2. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by

demolition operations, as directed. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of the Work.

B. Do not throw materials from windows or use metal chutes. Use hoists, wheelbarrows, plywood chutes or other acceptable methods.

C. In removal of existing materials, take care not to damage Work remaining in place, salvable materials, or equipment. Repair or replace any existing construction, materials, or equipment damaged during demolition, to the Owner’s satisfaction at no additional cost.

D. Remove all materials completely and neatly, leaving surfaces smooth and ready for new Work. Sawcut where necessary. Do not use jackhammers as a means of cutting.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Locate demolition equipment so as not to impose excessive loads to supporting walls, floors, roof or framing.

06/21/2019



B. Carefully remove equipment and materials, or fixtures which are to be reused.

C. Remove all combustible materials from the Site.

D. Disconnect or shut off service to areas where electrical work is to be removed. Remove all electrical fixtures, equipment and related switches, outlets, conduit and wiring which are not a part of the final Project in all areas where Work of this Contract is to be performed.

E. Maintain all existing circuits to items that are to remain in use.

F. Existing outlets which are to be removed and have conduits rising from the floor slab shall have the conduits cut below floor level. Rework as required to provide feed-through service to other remaining outlets. Pull new wire between remaining outlets affected by feed-through. Patch floor as required to restore to original condition.

G. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be removed. Conduits protruding from concrete shall be cut below floor level. Patch floor as required to restore to original condition.

H. Abandoned outlet boxes in walls to remain shall be closed with blank coverplates. If equipped with devices, the devices shall be removed and the conductors removed to the adjacent outlet or reconnected as required to provide feed-through service.

I. Panelboards flush in masonry walls shall have their bussing removed and a blank steel plate installed over the panelboard cabinet to cover the entire opening.

J. Disconnect and remove electrical connections to equipment designated to be removed by other trades.

3.4 RELOCATION

A. Items designated to be relocated, shall be removed and stored until the construction is ready for their installation.

B. All lighting fixtures designated to be relocated shall be cleaned and relamped.

3.5 EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN

A. All electrical items and lighting fixtures designated to remain are to be cleaned, in addition, lighting fixtures shall be relamped. All outlet boxes shall have knockout plugs installed in unused openings. All panelboards are to have blank covers installed in unused circuit breaker spaces.

B. All existing outlets, equipment, and associated wiring and conduit systems which interfere with the work of the General Trades, Structural, Plumbing, Fire Protection, or HVAC Contractors shall be reworked as required to maintain system operation. Relocate conduits where they will not interfere with new work of other trades.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

06/21/2019



A. Disposal of hazardous materials (ex: lighting fixture ballasts) shall be in accordance with Federal and State Environmental Protection Agency regulations. A signed statement signifying proper disposal shall be furnished to the Building Owner in the Record and Information Manuals.

B. Disposal of other materials shall be in accordance with State and Local regulations.

C. Cleanup 1. Leave inside of building “broom clean” in all areas. 2. Remove barricades as directed.


06/21/2019


LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. VFD: Variable frequency drive.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Okonite 7. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type THW-2 2. Type THHN-2-THWN-2 3. Type XHHW-2 4. Type SO.

D. VFD Cable:

1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable. 2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus

85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

06/21/2019



3. Comply with UL requirements for application.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Wire size shall meet or exceed the overcurrent device ampacity as required by NFPA 70. Where wire size shown on drawings is larger than the apparent ampacity requirements the size shown should prevail to account for voltage drop. The minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG except for control wiring, which may be #14 AWG.

B. Conductors: Copper, solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance may utilize the following: 1. Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway 2. Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway

B. Exposed Feeders may utilize the following: 1. Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway 2. Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway

06/21/2019



C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: 1. Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway

D. Feeders in Cable Tray: 1. Type TC-ER tray cable, single or multiple conductor, 2. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: 1. Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: 1. Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway 2. Metal-clad cable, Type MC

G. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: 1. Type TC-ER single and multiple conductors, 2. Mineral-insulated, metal-sheathed cable, Type MI

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. VFD Output Circuits: 1. Type TC-ER cable with braided shield with dual tape shield.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. MC Cable may be used for branch circuiting to wiring devices provided it is supported properly and run taut. MC must transition to other approved wire types prior to leaving the room it is permitted in. MC may not be used for home-runs.

B. MC Cable may be used for lighting fixture whips, no longer than 6’-0” and shall be properly supported.

C. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

D. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

E. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

06/21/2019



G. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

H. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

I. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.


A. Contractor shall perform insulation resistance (IR) tests, commonly called “megger” tests on any feeder or circuit which may have been damaged during installation or where identified as questionable by the Architect or Engineer. Test shall be performed according to standards published by ANSI/NETA.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements.

06/21/2019



3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


06/21/2019


GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Test wells. 2. Ground rods. 3. Ground rings. 4. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.


A. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, and marked for intended location and application.

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. 2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Fushi Copperweld Inc. 5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 6. Harger Lightning and Grounding. 7. ILSCO. 8. Newton Instument Company. 9. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 10. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 11. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. Conductors shall be identified by green insulation or by applying green tape at accessible locations.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: Copper or tinned wire solid or stranded conductors.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, minimum 1/4” by 4 inches by 20 inches and, with 3/8-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.3 CONNECTORS

A. UL Listed and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad, 3/4 inch by 10 feet. Provide sectional ground rods as needed.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, telecom rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches minimum from wall, 6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Exothermic welded connectors except at test wells and as

otherwise indicated. 3. Connections to Structural Steel: Exothermic welded connectors.

3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE

A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. Grounding electrode shall include, at a minimum, driven rod(s), metallic water piping system, concrete encased reinforcing steel, and structural steel. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.

3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. In addition to the complete metal conduit system, install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. Minimum equipment grounding conductor size shall be #12 AWG.

B. Motor frames shall be bonded to the equipment grounding system by an independent ground wire, sized to match the equipment grounding conductor.

C.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system

06/21/2019



ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.

D. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 70 feet apart.



1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.


1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

06/21/2019



F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.


06/21/2019


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1

SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RGC: Rigid Galvanized Conduit.


A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Eaton’s B-Line Series – Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp.

06/21/2019



e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Atkore International. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Supports shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Where installed outdoors or subject to corrosion stainless steel supports shall be provided.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement

concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. 6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

06/21/2019



C. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, metallic raceways may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

B. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. Powder-actuated fasteners may not be used in occupied buildings.

6. To Steel: Welded threaded studs with lock washers and nuts, Beam clamps, or Spring-tension clamps.

7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

3.3 PAINTING


1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

2. See additional requirements where painting specification are included as part of this project.

3. Where finish painting is not included in the general trades contract, or when the Electrical Contractor is the sole contractor, provide prime coat and two finish coats of paint to all ferrous metal which is not galvanized.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780 / A780M.


06/21/2019


RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 4. Surface raceways. 5. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 6. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.

B. FMC: Flexible Metal conduit.

C. RGC: Rigid galvanized threaded steel conduit.

D. HDPE: High Density Polyethelene.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquid-Tight Flexible metal conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.


A. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For solvent cements and adhesive primers,

documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


06/21/2019



A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.




4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Source quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Carlon 5. Cantex 6. Champion 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. O-Z/Gedney. 9. Picoma Industries. 10. Republic Conduit. 11. Robroy Industries. 12. Southwire Company. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 14. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 15. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.2 CONDUIT TYPES - APPLICATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS:

1. Not to be used in corrosive atmospheres.

2. . 3. .

06/21/2019



B. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. 1. Not to be used underground or where exposed to weather. 2. Not to be used in utility tunnels or corrosive atmospheres.

C. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum. 1. For use with fixture whips and lighting fixtures (6’ max). 2. For connections to dynamic equipment and connections to motors in airstream. 3. For use in existing walls. 4. .

D. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653. 1. For use with telecommunications cabling and fiber optic cable, indoors where not

exposed to physical damage.

2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products equal to one of the following. 1. Appleton 2. Cooper Industries 3. Efcor 4. Steel City 5. T&B 6. By Raceway Manufacturer 7. or equal.

B. Metallic fittings shall comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514b.

C. All fittings shall be UL listed for the application.

D. EMT: 1. Steel fittings, setscrew type, non-insulated, concrete tight. Cooper Industries #450 series,

or equal. 2. Steel fittings, compression type, insulated throats. Cooper Industries #1600 series,

or equal.

E. FMC: 1. Non-insulated, malleable iron, clamp type. Cooper industries #700 series or equal

2.4 CONDUIT SIZES

A. Minimum Raceway Size 3/4-inch trade size.

06/21/2019



2.5 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Mono-Systems, Inc. 4. Schneider Electric - Square D.

B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, unless otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.

1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be NEMA 3R, listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of-Design product.

a. Mono-Systems, Inc. b. Panduit Corp. c. Wiremold / Legrand.

C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard custom colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing characteristics.

06/21/2019



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following. Where a specific manufacturer is listed in the Drawings, this shall be considered the Basis-of Design product.

a. Hubbell Incorporated. b. Mono-Systems, Inc. c. Panduit Corp. d. Wiremold / Legrand.

2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Adalet. 2. Eaton 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. Mono-Systems, Inc. 11. O-Z/Gedney. 12. RACO; Hubbell. 13. Robroy Industries. 14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 17. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. Boxes shall be galvanized or plated finish.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: For use in surface mounted applications. Comply with NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.

06/21/2019



H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square or octagonal by 2-1/8 inches deep. Provide extension rings as required for recessed boxes.

I. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor application, Type 3R for outdoor applications (unless otherwise noted on drawings), with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 for indoor application, Type 3R for outdoor applications (unless otherwise noted on drawings), galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. 5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.

B. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

C. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F .

E. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

F. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

G. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

06/21/2019



A. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

B. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction.

C. Conduit shall be run overhead unless specifically shown on drawings to run under the slab.

D. Conceal raceways within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

E. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached.

F. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:

1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or

in an enclosure.

G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound prior to assembly.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

K. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

M. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

O. Surface Raceways:

1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.

06/21/2019



2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not acceptable support methods.

P. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

Q. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure. 3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated.

S. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

T. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel.

U. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

V. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

W. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.

3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORT

A. Secure feeder conduit to basic structural elements with galvanized strap hangers and clamps; use of trapeze type hangers is encouraged for multiple conduits where space will permit. Galvanized metal clamps and screws may be used for attaching and supporting branch circuit conduit. Nonmetallic fasteners shall not be used except plastic inserts may be used in concrete for small conduits.

B. Vertical conduits shall be supported at each floor by clamps.

06/21/2019



3.3 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Anchors and fasteners shall be of a type designed and intended for use in the base material to which the material support is to be attached and shall be capable of supporting the intended load and withstanding any associated stresses and vibrations.

B. In general, screws shall be used in wood, masonry anchors on concrete or brick, toggle bolts in hollow walls, and machine screws, bolts or welded studs on steel.

3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.


06/21/2019


IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Exposed Raceways:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Colors for Concealed Raceways Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."

D. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Provide at all splice or junction boxes and at 30’ maximum intervals.

E. Tape and Stencil for Concealed Raceways Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 4-inch- wide black stripes on 10-inch centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches wide. Stop stripes at legends. Provide legend at 30’ maximum intervals.

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size.

06/21/2019



B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Write-on, 3-mil thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. Provide label at each termination point.

C. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. Provide at each field splice and termination point.

2.3 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. 2-inch- wide, 5-mil pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with black and white stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16-inch-thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.

1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

06/21/2019



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Apply only to finished surfaces.

B. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

C. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

D. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

E. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon. 2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG, if authorities having jurisdiction permit.

b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

B. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

06/21/2019



C. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

D. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 3. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, identify all sources:

a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections.

E. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

F. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for Power Transfer.

G. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

c. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. d. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. e. Enclosed switches. f. Enclosed circuit breakers. g. Enclosed controllers. h. Variable-speed controllers. i. Push-button stations. j. Power transfer equipment. k. Contactors. l. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. m. Power-generating units. n. Monitoring and control equipment. o. .

06/21/2019




06/21/2019


LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1

SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Time Clock. 2. Photoelectric switches. 3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls. 4. Indoor occupancy sensors. 5. Outdoor motion sensors. 6. Lighting contactors. 7. Emergency shunt relays.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME CLOCK

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Intermatic, Inc. 2. Paragon Time Controls 3. Emersion Network Power; ASCO Lighting Control 4. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.

B. Electronic Time Clock: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2. Contact Configuration: single pole, single throw (SPST) or as indicated on the drawings. 3. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac. Provide inductive load rated contact

where shown on drawings to control motor loads. 4. Programs: Minimum, two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set

points for each day of the week. 5. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. 6. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Greengate

06/21/2019



2. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. 3. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. 4. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. 5. Sensor Switch, Inc. 6. Watt Stopper.

B. Devices Types: Devices located in stairwells shall be ultrasonic type. All other locations shall be dual-technology (PIR and Ultrasonic) type, unless otherwise noted on drawings or in this specification.

C. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.


2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack.

4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast/driver load at 120- and 277-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70.

5. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of

the space and help eliminate false "off" switching. 9. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected

lighting level is present.

D. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for mounting in a single gang switchbox.


2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F. 3. Switch Rating:

a. Line Voltage Units: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent or LED at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent or LED at 277 V.

b. Low Voltage Units: Suitable for use with relay-based lighting control system. Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack relay.

06/21/2019



4. Onboard 0-10V dimming control (sinking) with integral rocker switch for adjusting light levels up/down.

E. General Requirements for Sensors: High-bay occupancy sensor, solid-state unit. The unit is designed to operate with the luminaires indicated.


2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and to half-power when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights to half-power that is adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 16 minutes.

3. Continuous Lamp Monitoring: When lamps are dimmed continuously for 24 hours, automatically turn lamps on to full power for 15 minutes for every 24 hours of continuous dimming.

4. Operating Ambient Conditions: 32 to 149 deg F. 5. Mounting: Threaded pipe. 6. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door. 7. Detector Technology: PIR. 8. Detector Coverage: User selectable by interchangeable PIR lenses, suitable for mounting

heights from 12 to 50 feet. 9. Accessories: Obtain manufacturer's installation and maintenance kit with laser alignment

tool for sensor positioning and power port connectors.

F. General Requirements for Sensors: Extreme Temperature ceiling-mounted, solid-state, extreme-temperature occupancy sensors with a separate power pack.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended application in damp locations.

2. Operation: Turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes.

3. Operating Ambient Conditions: From minus 40 to plus 125 deg F. 4. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.

Sensor is powered from the power pack. 5. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, and for 1 hp

at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. 6. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind cover.

7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. 8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 10 fc; keep lighting off when

selected lighting level is present.

06/21/2019




A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller than No. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.

B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors. 2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each

sensor.

B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.

06/21/2019




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.


D. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within twelve (12) months from date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two (2) visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set time delay to suit Owner's operations.

2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's operations.

3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 260943.13 "Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.


06/21/2019


PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 3. Load centers. 4. Electronic-grade panelboards.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:




B. Field Quality-Control Reports:

06/21/2019



1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

C. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards, schedule shall reflect as-built conditions.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with UL 67.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than SEVEN days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission. 3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

06/21/2019



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: FIVE years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. All panelboards shall be rated, listed and labeled for the available short-circuit current by the manufacturer. Minimum interrupting rating of 10,000 amps.

C. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully Rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

D. Enclosures:

1. Provide flush and surface enclosures as described on the drawings. Each enclosure shall be rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel with factory enamel finish. b. Panel Tubs: Galvanized steel.

4. Locking type doors with concealed hinges 5. Panel tubs shall be 20” wide x 5” deep, minimum. 6. Directory card mounted inside panelboard door inside a transparent card holder. 7. Hinged Front Cover: Door-in-Door construction where entire front trim hinged to box

and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

E. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Copper. 2. Neutral bus (where required) shall be supplied separate from ground Bus. 3. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as

suitable for nonlinear loads. 4.

F. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

06/21/2019



1. Material: copper, or CU/AL bi-metallic type. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. 4. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity

neutral bus.

G. Where used as service equipment, panelboards shall carry a Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

B. Surge Protective Devices shall be provided for all Emergency panelboards (as defined by NEC article 700), and where indicated on drawings. Devices shall be Type II, as specified in section 26 43 13 - Surge Protection for Low Voltage Electrical Power Circuits. Device shall be remote mounted above or below panel enclosure, served from a load side overcurrent protective device, coordinate with SPD manufacture for overcurrent protective device size. SPD circuit conductor length shall not exceed 18”.

1. For service equipment provide Type 1, located ahead of the service disconnect.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Schneider Electric (Square D), NQ (240V) or NF (480V) Style or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton 2. General Electric 3. Siemens

B. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

2.4 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state electronic trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall mounted panelboards shall be installed so that the top of the cabinet is 6’-0” above the floor, coordinate panelboard location to avoid interference with other equipment.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. Assure door swing does not interfere with other equipment.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Where panelboards are to be recessed, stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

G. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

06/21/2019




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

C. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 05 73 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.


06/21/2019


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI 2. Weather-resistant receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Solid-state fan speed controls. 5. Communications outlets. 6. Device cover plates. 7. Multioutlet assemblies.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'

packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

06/21/2019



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Cooper b. Hubbell c. Legrand d. Leviton e. Lutron f. Pass & Seymour

2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Devices shall be side-wired. Devices that use modular plug-in connectors are not acceptable.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 volt, 20 amp: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.

B. All convenience and power receptacles shall be Heavy Duty Specification grade, grounding type.

C. Tamper Resistant Receptacles: All 120V and 250V, 15A and 20A, non-locking type receptacles installed in the following locations shall be listed Tamper Resistant, in compliance with NEC 406.12:

1. Dwelling units 2. Guest rooms and guest suites of hotels and motels 3. Child care facilities 4. Preschool and Elementary education facilities 5. Business offices, corridors, waiting rooms in clinics, medical and dental offices and

outpatient facilities. 6. Assembly occupancies including gymnasiums, skating rinks, auditoriums, and places of

waiting transportation. 7. Dormitories

D. Specialty receptacles shall be as specified on Drawings.

06/21/2019



2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description:

1. Straight blade, feed-through type, unless specified otherwise on Drawings. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 3. Comply with UL 943, device shall be self-testing and provide visual or audible alarm

upon ground fault condition. 4. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer

provides proper GFCI protection.

B. Weather resistant Receptacle shall be ultra-violet, corrosion, and impact resistant, with UL approved “WR” marking on face.

2.5 TOGGLE SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.

B. Switches, 120/277 volt, 20 amp:

C. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 volt, 20 amp; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors.

2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable Slider,; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces:

a. High impact, Verify color with Architect. 3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed

and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Device Color:

06/21/2019



1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect/Engineer unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including final painting, is complete.

C. Conductors: 1. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid

scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 2. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,

Article 300, without pigtails. 3. Existing Conductors:

a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until immediately prior to occupancy.

3. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

4. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 5. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold

device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

06/21/2019



1. Devices shall be installed vertically with ground pin up, where explicitly shown to be mounted horizontally, position the ground pin to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. The use of caulk around device plates to seal gaps shall not be permitted.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Adjust mounting height and location of Devices: Where devices are installed to serve furniture or furnishings, or otherwise located in the vicinity of furniture or furnishings, the mounting height and location of such Devices shall be adjusted to permit full access to the Devices without the need to move furniture or furnishings. Provide proposed modifications of mounting height and locations for each Device to be changed to Engineer for approval prior to rough-in of said Device.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value over 5 percent is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit

breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Wiring device shall be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


06/21/2019




06/21/2019


SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS 264313 - 1

SECTION 264313 - SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes field-mounted Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and control equipment.

B. Refer to the following specification sections for Surge Protective Devices which are to be factory installed in equipment. 1. 26 24 16 – Panelboards

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Inominal: Nominal discharge current.

B. MCOV: Maximum continuous operating voltage.

C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection: The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.

D. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage characteristic.

E. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

F. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

G. SPD: Surge protective device.

H. VPR: Voltage protection rating.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.


A. Field quality-control reports.

06/21/2019



B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, unless listed otherwise in the following paragraphs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS

A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


C. Where surge protective device is shown attached to an automatic transfer switch or other equipment without integral overcurrent protective devices, provide surge protective device with integral disconnect switch.

D. Provide device in powder coated, impact resistant steel enclosure. Where shown to be installed outdoors, provide weatherproof NEMA 3R enclosure.

a. .

2.2 SPD FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Joslyn by Thomas & Betts (TransEnd 50) or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Eaton 2. Emerson 3. GE 4. Schneider Electric 5. Siemens

B. Provide UL 1449, Type 2 devices suitable for the voltage shown on the drawings.

06/21/2019



C. Surge capacity of 100,000A per phase, 50,000A per mode, fully rated (SCCR) of 65KAIC, with TEN modes of protection (L-L, L-G, L-N, N-G). Each mode shall be protected with individually fused MOVs. Nominal discharge current (I-n) shall be 20,000A.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories: a. Indicator light display for protection status. b. Metallic flexible conduit whip. c. Transient Filter complying with UL 1283 for electromagnetic interference. d. Form-C contacts (1 N.O, 1 N.C.), for remote monitoring of protection status,

where indicated on drawings.


A. Power Wiring: Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Cables."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.

C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.

D. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative.

1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation

requirements.

B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


06/21/2019



3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them immediately after the testing is over.

C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.


06/21/2019


LED INTERIOR LIGHTING 265119 - 1

SECTION 265119 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for LED luminaires indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on the drawings.

B. Luminaire supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Fixture: See "Luminaire."

D. IP: International Protection or Ingress Protection Rating.

E. LED: Light-emitting diode.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.



1. Arrange in order of luminaire designation. 2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires. 4. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. 5. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests IES LM-79 and IES

LM-80.

a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer.

7. LED driver or power supply product data sheets for each luminaire.

06/21/2019



B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom luminaires.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of luminaire assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Where specifically indicated on plans, include photometric PxP drawings for areas where

alternate fixtures are supplied.

C. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




B. Product Certificates: For each type of luminaire.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1. One (1) copy of each approved submittal.

2. Certificate of Material Receipt.



1. Drivers: TEN percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Diffusers and Lenses: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type. 3. Globes and Guards: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.


A. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.

06/21/2019



B. Each luminaire type shall be binned within a three-step MacAdam Ellipse to ensure color consistency among luminaires.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty Period: FIVE year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant.

The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

A. Provide Luminaires as scheduled on the Drawings.

B. Provide luminaires with integral thermal protection.

C. LED luminaire shall be modular in design with the ability to replace individual components (LED Modules, drivers, etc.) without having to replace the entire luminaire.

D. All LED luminaire shall have a minimum CRI of 80.

E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise per the luminaire schedule, all LED lamp CCT shall be 4000K.

F. LED/LED Module and driver shall be rated for a minimum of 50,000 hours of life at 80% output (LM-80).

G. For each type Luminaire, the LED/LED Module shall originate from a common manufactured batch source.

H. All LED/LED Module shall adhere to LED package manufacturer guidelines, certification programs, and test procedures for thermal management.

I. Driver shall be FCC Part 15 compliant, UL 8750.

J. Driver shall meet ANSI C62.41 category A surge protection standards up to 4kV.

K. All LED drivers shall have a power factor greater than 0.90.

L. Emergency LED battery pack shall be integral mounted, ninety (90) minute capacity, sealed maintenance free nickel cadmium battery and integral charger, operate at rated lumen output of

06/21/2019



fixture or next highest lumen output available providing no less than 50% of the standard lumen output, and have remote mountable charging indicator light and test switch. LED drivers shall feature a self-diagnostic circuit that automatically tests unit and reports failure with an audible and visual alarm.

M. Ambient Temperature: Indoor Luminaires, 41 to 104 deg F.; Outdoor Luminaires, 5 to 104 deg F.

1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent.

2.2 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS


B. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. c. CCT and CRI.

C. Recessed luminaires shall comply with NEMA LE 4.

2.3 METAL FINISHES

A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.4 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch minimum diameter steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire.

C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 14 AWG. Min.

D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

E. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

06/21/2019



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.


3.2 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

A. If approved by the Architect, use selected permanent luminaires for temporary lighting. When construction is sufficiently complete, clean luminaires used for temporary lighting and install new lamps.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

1. Sized and rated for luminaire weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position after cleaning and relamping. 3. Provide support for luminaire without causing deflection of ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire weight and a vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Flush-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secured to outlet box. 2. Attached to ceiling structural members at four points equally spaced around

circumference of luminaire. 3. Trim ring flush with finished surface.

F. Wall-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Where recommended by luminaire manufacturer, attach to structural members in walls. Otherwise mount fixture to back box.

2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

06/21/2019



1. Ceiling Mount: a. Provide quantity of stems or adjustable aircraft cable to support suspended fixtures

as described in the luminaire schedule and manufactures installation instructions.

2. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 3. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

4. Continuous Rows of Luminaires: Use stems, rod, or aircraft cable support as indicated in luminaire schedule, for suspension of each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end. Maximum span shall not exceed 12’.

5. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

H. Ceiling-Grid-Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure luminaire to the luminaire opening using approved fasteners in a minimum of four

locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid in a

minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire. 4. Do not use ceiling grid as support for luminaires. Support with aircraft cable or similar

wire from building structure from a minimum of TWO locations, independent of the ceiling system.

I. Comply with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" for wiring connections.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.

2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


06/21/2019



3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.16 "Addressable-Luminaire Lighting Controls."

B. Comply with requirements for startup specified in Section 260943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within TWELVE months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting the direction of aim of luminaires to suit occupied conditions. Make up to TWO visits to Project during other-than-normal hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required during hours of darkness.

1. During adjustment visits, inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps or luminaires that are defective.

2. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3. Adjust the aim of luminaires in the presence of the Architect.


06/21/2019


EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING 265213 - 1

SECTION 265213 - EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Emergency lighting units. 2. Exit signs. 3. Luminaire supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: A lighting unit with internal or external emergency battery powered supply and the means for controlling and charging the battery and unit operation.

D. Fixture: See "Luminaire" Paragraph.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit, including lamp, reflector, and housing.


A. Product Data: For each type of emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and emergency lighting support.

1. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. 2. Include physical description of the unit and dimensions. 3. Battery and charger for light units. 4. Include life, output of luminaire (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data. 5. Include photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying

with IES LM-45, for each luminaire type. a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by manufacturer's

laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Product Schedule:

1. For all luminaires and exit signs, use same designations indicated on Drawings.

06/21/2019




A. Seismic Qualification Data: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




4. Provide seismic qualification certificate for each piece of equipment.

B. Product Test Reports: For each luminaire for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and lighting systems to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.



1. Lamps: TEN percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. 2. Luminaire-mounted, emergency battery pack: FIVE percent emergency lighting units.

Furnish at least one of each type. 3. Diffusers and Lenses: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one

of each type. 4. Globes and Guards: ONE percent of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of

each type.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's laboratory that is accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

C. Mockups: For interior luminaires in room or module mockups, complete with power and control connections.

1. Obtain Architect's approval of luminaires and signs in mockups before starting installations.

06/21/2019



2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: TWO year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Power Unit Batteries: FIVE years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

2. Warranty Period for Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: FIVE years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for the entire warranty period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event."

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING


B. NRTL Compliance: Fabricate and label emergency lighting units, exit signs, and batteries to comply with UL 924.

C. Comply with NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

D. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for recessed luminaires.

06/21/2019



E. Internal Type Emergency Power Unit: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within luminaire body.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp or an equivalent number of LED’s continuously at an output of no less than 50% of total lumen output upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: a. Ambient Temperature: Indoor Luminaires, 41 to 104 deg F.; Outdoor Luminaires,

5 to 104 deg F.. b. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140

deg F. c. Humidity: More than 95 percent (condensing).

4. Test Push-Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening luminaire or entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

5. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 6. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 7. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

F. External Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, suitable for powering one or more lamps, remote mounted from luminaire.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one lamp or an equivalent number of LED’s continuously at an output of no less than 50% of total lumen output upon loss of normal power. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to luminaire.

2. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

3. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 4. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type. 5. Housing: NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure listed for installation inside, on top of, or remote

from luminaire. Remote assembly shall be located no less than half the distance recommended by the emergency power unit manufacturer, whichever is less.

06/21/2019



6. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

7. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

8. Remote Test: Switch in handheld remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

9. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING

A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units: Self-contained units.

B. Emergency Luminaires: 1. Emergency Luminaires: Drawing designation as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on

Drawings, with the following additional features: a. Rated for installation in damp locations, and for sealed and gasketed luminaires in

wet locations. Indoor and outdoor applications as shown on plans. b. UL 94 flame rating.

C. Emergency Lighting Unit: 1. Emergency Lighting Unit: as indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on Drawings. 2. Operating at nominal voltage matching lighting system. 3. Wall, ceiling, or stem mounted with universal junction box adaptor. 4. UV stable thermoplastic housing. 5. Two LED lamp heads. 6. Internal emergency power unit.

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Operating at nominal voltage as shown on plans. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs; 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 3. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Internal emergency power unit.

a. Master Unit: Comply with requirements above for self-powered exit signs, and provide additional battery capacity for power connection to remote units where shown.

C. Self-Luminous Signs: 1. Powered by tritium gas, with universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

Signs shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to maintain the minimum brightness requirements in UL 924 for 20 years.

06/21/2019



2. Use strontium oxide aluminate compound to store ambient light and release the stored energy when the light is removed. Include universal bracket for flush-ceiling, wall, or end mounting.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Metal Parts:

1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

2.6 METAL FINISHES

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel and angle iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Support Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of luminaires.

B. Examine roughing-in for luminaire to verify actual locations of luminaire and electrical connections before luminaire installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install lamps in each luminaire.

D. Supports:

06/21/2019



1. Sized and rated for luminaire and emergency power unit weight. 2. Able to maintain luminaire position when testing emergency power unit. 3. Provide support for luminaire and emergency power unit without causing deflection of

ceiling or wall. 4. Luminaire-mounting devices shall be capable of supporting a horizontal force of 100

percent of luminaire and emergency power unit weight and vertical force of 400 percent of luminaire weight.

E. Wall-Mounted Luminaire Support: 1. Where recommended by luminaire manufacturer, attach to structural members in walls.

Otherwise mount fixture to back box. 2. Do not attach luminaires directly to gypsum board.

F. Suspended Luminaire Support:

1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Support with

approved outlet box and accessories that hold stem and provide damping of luminaire oscillations. Support outlet box vertically to building structure using approved devices.

3. Do not use ceiling grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

G. Ceiling Grid Mounted Luminaires:

1. Secure to any required outlet box. 2. Secure emergency power unit using approved fasteners in a minimum of four locations,

spaced near corners of emergency power unit. 3. Use approved devices and support components to connect luminaire to ceiling grid and

building structure in a minimum of four locations, spaced near corners of luminaire.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."



1. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.

B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.


06/21/2019



3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service:

1. Charge [emergency power units] [and] [batteries] minimum of one hour and depress switch to conduct short-duration test.

2. Charge [emergency power units] [and] [batteries] minimum of 24 hours and conduct one-hour discharge test.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjustments: Within 12months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site visit to do the following:

1. Inspect all luminaires. Replace lamps, emergency power units, batteries,signs,or luminaires that are defective.

a. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

2. Conduct short-duration tests on all emergency lighting.


06/21/2019



TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 1

SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Soil treatment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide

products.


A. Product certificates.

B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:

1. Date and time of application.

2. Moisture content of soil before application.

3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.

4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.

5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.

6. Areas of application.

7. Water source for application.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project

is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install

manufacturer's products.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and

Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment

will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes

formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period,

re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.



TERMITE CONTROL 313116 - 2

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an

aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.

1. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than

three years against infestation of subterranean termites.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as wood debris,

tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil within and

around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could

decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.

3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute

treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate

for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous

horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under

building construction.

1. Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building

slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete

footings and slabs are placed.

2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls;

along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit

penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along

the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing.

B. Post warning signs in areas of application.

C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
